Chevrolet 2000 Suburban Owners Manual Owner's

2015-10-23

: Chevrolet Chevrolet-2000-Chevrolet-Suburban-Owners-Manual-813533 chevrolet-2000-chevrolet-suburban-owners-manual-813533 chevrolet pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 407

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Every
2000
Tahoe/Suburban
under warranty is
backed with the
following
services:

Courtesy
Transportation

1-800-CHEV-USA ®

( For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800)
that provides in an emergency:

Free lockout assistance
Free dead-battery assistance
Free out-of-fuel assistance
Free flat-tire change
Emergency towing

2000 Chevrolet Tahoe/Suburban
Owner's Manual

Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number C2016 A First Edition

Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Section 1

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts

Air Bag Systems
Child Restraints

Features and Controls
Section 2

Keys and Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Liftgate
Automatic Transmission Operation
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Windows
Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Windshield Wipers
Cruise Control

Interior and Exterior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
Convenience Net/Cargo Cover/Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)
Accessory Power Outlets
OnStar® System (If Equipped)
Sunroof (If Equipped)
HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Message Center

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Section 3

Heating and Air Conditioning
Setting the Radio Clock

Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Radio Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

Your Driving and the Road
Section 4

Braking/Anti-lock Brakes
Steering
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Off-Road Driving

Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

Problems on the Road
Section 5

Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle

Engine Overheating
Changing a Flat Tire
If You're Stuck

iii

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Section 6

Fuel
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Tires and Wheels
Appearance Care
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Maintenance Schedule
Section 7

Scheduled Maintenance
Periodic Maintenance Inspections

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Maintenance Records

Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Section 8

Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Customer Assistance Offices
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation

Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-10
Service Publications

Index
Section 9

In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.

Please refer to the last page of this manual for your Service Station Guide

We support voluntary
technician certification.

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, the name
TAHOE, and the name SUBURBAN are registered
trademarks of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the
product after that time without further notice. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new
owner can use it.

For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez
votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9

How to Use this Manual

Safety Warnings and Symbols

Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.

You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.

CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is. Then
we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or
others could be hurt.

vii

You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t
let this happen.”

In the notice area, we tell you about something that can
damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would
not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or
in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:

NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.

viii

Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY

These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:

DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK

These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH

WINDSHIELD
WIPER

TURN
SIGNALS

WINDSHIELD
WASHER

PARKING
LAMPS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS

POWER
WINDOW

AIR BAG

These symbols
are on some of
your controls:

HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER

DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS

FOG LAMPS

WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER

REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER

VENTILATING
FAN

These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:

Here are some
other symbols
you may see:

ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP

FUSE

BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM

LIGHTER

HORN
BRAKE

COOLANT

SPEAKER

ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE

FUEL

ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES

Model Reference
This manual covers these models:

Utility

Suburban

Service Station Guide
Cooling System

Tire Pressure

See Section 5

See Section 6

For
a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood

Spare Tire Pressure
See Section 5

See Section 6

Hood Release
See Section 6

Windshield Washer
Fluid
See Section 6

Engine Oil Dipstick
Battery
See Section 6

See Section 6

Oil Viscosity
Engine Oil
See Section 6

Fuel
Use unleaded gas only,
87 Octane or higher.
See Section 6

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-15
1-20
1-21
1-21
1-27
1-28
1-28
1-37

Seats and Seat Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts -- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag Systems
Center Passenger Position

1-38
1-41
1-44
1-47
1-60
1-63
1-63
1-63

Rear Seat Passengers
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety Belt Extender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash

1-1

Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down. It also tells you about
reclining front seatbacks and head restraints.

Manual Front Seat

CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.

If your vehicle has a manual bucket or split bench seat,
you can adjust it with this lever located at the front of
the seat.
Lift the lever at the front of the seat to unlock it. Using
your body, slide the seat to where you want it. Then,
release the lever and try to move the seat with your body
in order to make sure the seat is locked into place.

1-2

Manual Cushion Tilt (If Equipped)

Manual Lumbar Control (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has a
lumbar adjustment, you
can increase or decrease
lumbar support in an area
of the lower seatback.

If your vehicle has this feature, you can raise or lower
the front of the driver’s or passenger’s seat with this
lever located at the inside edge of the seat. To raise or
lower the front of the seat, move the lever up or down
in a continuous motion until the cushion reaches the
desired height.

To increase support, turn the knob towards the front of
the vehicle. Operating effort can be reduced if you lean
forward slightly while turning the knob.
To decrease support, turn the knob towards the rear of
the vehicle.

1-3

Power Seat(s) (If Equipped)

Raise the front of the seat cushion by raising the forward
edge of the button. Lower the front of the seat cushion
by lowering the forward edge of the button. Move the
seat forward by moving the whole button toward the
front of the vehicle.
Raise the rear of the seat cushion by raising the rear
edge of the button. Lower the rear of the seat cushion
by lowering the rear edge of the button. Move the seat
rearward by moving the whole button toward the rear of
the vehicle.
Moving the whole button up or down raises or lowers
the entire seat cushion.

Horizontal Control: If your vehicle has a power seat,
you can adjust it with these controls located at the
outside edge of the seat.

1-4

Vertical Control: If your vehicle has the power
reclining seats, you can use this button to adjust the
angle of the seatback. Move the reclining front seatback
rearward by moving the button toward the rear of the
vehicle. Move the seatback forward by moving the
button toward the front of the vehicle. See “Reclining
Seatbacks” in the Index for further information.

Power Lumbar Control (If Equipped)

Memory Seat (If Equipped)

If you have power lumbar
adjustment, you can
increase or decrease
lumbar support in an area
of the lower seatback.

To increase support, press and hold the front of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the rear of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
You can also reshape the side wing area of the lower
seatback for more lateral support.
To increase support, press and hold the top of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.
To decrease support, press and hold the bottom of the
control. Let go of the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of support.

The memory function
controls the driver’s
seat cushion and recliner
positions and is located
on the driver’s door
trim panel.

It does not store the lumbar or back support positions.
To set your memory seat:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat to your desired position.
2. Press the SET button and then press the 1 or 2
side of the memory control within five seconds.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P), press the 1 or 2
button of the memory control to recall the seat setting.
To do the same thing for a second driver, follow the
preceding steps, but press the other number of the
memory control. The memory feature only works
when the transmission is in PARK (P).

1-5

Heated Front Seats (If Equipped)

Reclining Seatbacks

If your vehicle has heated
front seats, the ignition
must be in RUN for them
to operate.

The control for the driver’s side heated seat is located
on the driver’s side door panel. The control for the
passenger’s side heated seat is located on the passenger’s
side door panel.
To activate the heated seats, press the button once for
the HI heat setting. Press the button again for the LO
heat setting. To turn off the heated seats, press the
button a third time. An indicator light on the button will
illuminate for each heat setting anytime the heated seats
are operating.
The heated front seats will be canceled after the ignition
is turned to OFF. If you still want to use the heated front
seat feature after you restart your vehicle, you will need
to press the heated seat button again.

1-6

To adjust the front seatback, lift the lever upward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Lift the lever again upward and the seatback will go to
an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see “Power Seats” in the Index for further information
on how to operate the reclining seatback feature.

CAUTION:

But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.

Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.

1-7

Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the
restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.

Rear Seats

CAUTION:
If a head restraint is not installed on the seatback
or stored in the vehicle properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could be injured.
Remove the head restraints only when you need
to fold the seat, and be sure that the head
restraints are stored securely in the space
provided on the folded up seat cushion. When the
seat is returned to the passenger position, be sure
the head restraints are installed properly.

1-8

Utility: The rear seat may have a 60/40 split seat which
may be folded down to give you more cargo space. The
rear seatbacks are equipped with rearward folding head
restraints. When the seatback is being folded down, the
head restraint will automatically fold rearward to allow
a flat load floor for cargo or entry to the third row seat
(if equipped).
Suburban/Yukon XL: The second row rear seat of
Suburban/Yukon XL models may have a 60/40 split seat
or rear bucket seats. Either side of the rear seat may be
folded down to give you more cargo space.
On Suburban/Yukon XL models with rear bucket seats,
the head restraints need to be removed in order to fold
the rear seat. To do this, lift the head restraints up until
they stop. Press in the button on the side of the head
restraint guide cap and lift up on the head restraint.
This will need to be repeated on the other cap. The
head restraint can be removed and stored in the space
provided on the folded up seat cushion.

On Suburban/Yukon XL models with bucket seats,
the seatbacks can be reclined. To adjust the seatback,
pull the lever located at the base of the back forward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want it.
Pull the lever again and the seatback will go to an
upright position. In order to fold the back of a bucket
seat into a horizontal load floor, the back must be in its
full upright position and not reclined.
On Suburban/Yukon XL models with 60/40 split bench
seats, before folding the rear seat on the driver’s side,
insert the two buckles into the retainer in the seatback.
That way, the buckles will be out of the way when the
seat is folded and will be available for passengers to use
when the seat is returned to the passenger position. Also,
make sure that nothing is under or in front of the seat
and that the head restraints are completely lowered.

To fold, pull up on the strap
loop at the rear of the seat
cushion. Then, pull the
seat cushion up and fold
it forward.

After folding the seat cushion fully forward, pull the
seatback forward and fold the seatback down until it is
flat. If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes
with the cushion, try moving the front seat forward
and/or bringing the front seatback more upright.
On the passenger side of Suburban/Yukon XL models,
the lever at the base of the seat must be rotated rearward
to release the seatback.

1-9

Pull forward on the seatback and up on the seat cushion
to make sure the seat is securely in place.
Check to see that the buckles on the driver’s side
seatback are accessible to the outboard and center
occupant and are not under the seat cushions.
If you have removed the head restraints to fold the rear
bucket seat, be sure to reinstall them on the seatback
after it has been returned to the normal seating position.
Be sure to return the head restraints to the upright
position on Utility models.

To create a load floor, release the panels from the
seatback by pushing forward on the latch. Then fold
the panels back to cover the rear seat footwell area.
To return the seat to the passenger position on a
Suburban/Yukon XL, lift the floor load panels and latch
them into the seatback. Lift the seatback up and push
rearward all the way. Then lower the seat cushion until it
latches into position.

1-10

Entry to the Third Seat

Folding the Third Seat

Suburban/Yukon XL: The passenger’s side of the
second row 60/40 or rear bucket seats has an easy entry
feature. This makes it easy to get in and out of the third
seat, if your vehicle has one.

Utility: The seatback of the third seat (if equipped)
in utility models also folds down on the floor.

To operate the easy entry seat, rotate the release lever,
located near the back of the seat rearward.
Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle by
pulling the top of the seatback forward.

To fold the seatback down,
pull up on the release lever
labeled 1 located on the rear
of the seatback, then push
the seatback forward.

When you do, the seat bottom will release. Just pull the
seat forward until it stops.
Be sure to return the seat to the passenger position when
finished. Pull forward and push rearward on the seat to
make sure it is locked in place.
To return the seat to the passenger position, pull up
on the release lever labeled 1 and then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position. Push
forward on the seatback to make sure it is locked
into position.

1-11

If more cargo space is
desired, the third seat can
also be folded and tumbled
forward or removed if
necessary by pulling up on
the release lever labeled 2.

To return the seat to the passenger position, pull up on
the release lever and then pull up on the seatback until
it locks into the upright position. Push forward on the
seatback to make sure it is locked into position.
If still more cargo space is desired, the third seat can
also be folded and tumbled forward by using the lever,
labeled 2. To return the seats to their original position,
reverse the above steps.
Fold and Tilt Feature (Suburban/Yukon XL
Third Seat)

The seat locks into place and does not need to be removed
when carrying cargo. See “Removing the Third Row Seats ”
for Utility later in this section for removal instructions.
Suburban/Yukon XL: The seatback of the third seat
(if equipped) in Suburban/Yukon XL models also folds
down to create more cargo space.
To fold the seatback down, pull up on the release lever,
labeled 1, located on the rear of the seatback, then push
the seatback forward.

Once the third seatback has been folded down, the
entire seat can be tilted forward to create a flat load
floor. To do this, you will need to enter the rear cargo
area of the vehicle. Make sure the head restraints have
been lowered completely.
With the seat folded, unlatch the seat from the floor by
pulling up on the lever located under the carrying handle
at the rear of the seat labeled 2. Lift the rear of the seat
up, off of the floor. You will not be able to unlatch the
seat from the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
Tilt the seat fully forward and secure it in place using
the support rod located on the underside of the seat,
passenger side. Make sure the support rod pin is fully
engaged in the lock.

1-12

Push and pull on the seat, making sure that the support
rod is holding it firmly in place. Use the seat in this
position only when necessary for additional cargo space.

CAUTION:
If the support rod isn’t properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to
people and damage to your vehicle. Always be
sure the support rod is properly engaged when
the third row seat is folded forward.

Removing the Third Row Seats
Utility: If your vehicle has third row seating, it can be
taken out for more cargo space.
To remove the seat, fully open the rear doors and enter
the rear of the vehicle.
Fold the seatback forward
into the seat cushion by
using the lever labeled 1.
The seat cannot be
removed unless the
seatback is folded.

To return the seat to its seating position, push forward
on the seat and release the support lock rod. Secure the
support rod in its stored position on the underside of the
seat. Lower the seat to the floor and let the seat drop into
place. Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the
seat is locked in place.
Return the seatback to the upright position by pulling
up on the release lever labeled 1 before the back can be
folded upright. Pull the seatback forward to make sure it
is locked into place.

1-13

To unlatch the seat from the
back of the floor, pull up on
the release lever labeled 2
at the rear of the seat and
lift the rear of the seat up
from the floor.

Fold the seatback forward into the seat cushion by using
the lever labeled 1. The seat cannot be removed unless
the seatback is folded.
To unlatch the seat from the floor, pull up on the release
lever labeled 2 at the rear of the seat and lift the rear of
the seat up, off of the floor.
Pull on the strap at the rear of the seat to release the
front seat latches. Then, pull the seat straight back,
towards the rear of the vehicle and remove it. There are
wheels at the front of the seat to assist you.
Replacing the Rear Seat (Third Row Seats)

Pull on the release lever located in the lower middle to
unlatch the seat from the front of the floor and pull the
seat out. Use one hand on the release lever and the other
on the handle to pull the seat out.
Suburban/Yukon XL: If your vehicle has third row
seating, it can be taken out for more cargo space.
To remove the seat, fully open the rear doors and enter
the rear of the vehicle.

1-14

Utility: To put the seat back in, place the front of
the seat on the load floor facing towards the front of
the vehicle. Slide the wheels into the slots on the floor
and lock into place using the hooks there. Once the
latches are engaged pull on lever 3 to let the seat drop
into place. Release the lever labeled 1 to return the seat
to its upright position. Push and pull on the seat to make
sure it is locked into place.

Suburban/Yukon XL: To put the seat back in,
place the front of the seat on the load floor, facing the
front of the vehicle. While holding the rear of the seat
up use the wheels on the front of the seat to roll it
towards the seat hooks in the floor. When the latches
are engaged in the hooks, let the seat drop into place.
Lift up on the carrying handle to make sure the seat is
locked in place.
Raise the seatback into the upright position. Push and
pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place.
The seatback cannot be raised to the upright position
unless the seat is secured to the floor.

CAUTION:
A seat that isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop. People
in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure to lock
the seat into place properly when installing it.

Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.

CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear
a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the same crash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properly too.

1-15

In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.

CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people
to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a reminder
to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in
the Index.)

1-16

You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!

Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.

Put someone on it.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.

1-17

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.

1-18

The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...

or the instrument panel ...

or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.

1-19

Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts -- and the Answers
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?

You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.

If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?

Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air
bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.

1-20

If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?

You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called
“Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.

Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.

1-21

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash.

1-22

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly
as much protection this way.

1-23

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your
belt into the buckle nearest you.

The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

1-24

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen.

The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-25

What’s wrong with this?

CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work properly,
or ask your dealer to fix it.

The belt is twisted across the body.

1-26

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-27

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt
properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt -- except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out
all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back all the
way and start again.

Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air
bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags -- a frontal air bag for
the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.

1-28

Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag systems:

CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt -- even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in moderate
to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle
hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate
at all in rollover, rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants,
frontal air bags may provide less protection in
frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. The side impact air bags
for the driver and right front passenger are
designed to inflate only in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of your
vehicle. They aren’t designed to inflate in
frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether or not there’s
an air bag for that person.

CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an eye.
If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you
would be if you were leaning forward, it could
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
in position for air bag inflation before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door.

1-29

CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its air bag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this
manual called “Children.”

1-30

There is an air bag readiness
light on the instrument
panel, which shows the
air bag symbol.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index
for more information.

How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?

The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.

The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the
driver’s seatback closest to the door.

1-31

CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or
it might force the object into that person. The
path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear.
Don’t put anything between an occupant and an
air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.

The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the
side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

1-32

When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or
near-frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed
to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes
straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the
threshold level is about 9 to 16 mph (14 to 26 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range. If your vehicle strikes something
that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the
threshold level will be higher. The driver’s and right
front passenger’s frontal air bags are not designed
to inflate in rollovers, side impacts, or rear impacts,
because inflation would not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes involving a front door.
A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity
is above the system’s designed “threshold level.”
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact air
bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity
of the impact.
The air bag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain.
As always, wear your safety belt. See “Off-Road
Driving” in the Index for more tips on off-road driving.
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door.

1-33

How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal
air bags would not help you in many types of collisions,
including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you
in many types of collisions, including frontal or near
frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily
because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air
bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in
moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for
the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags,
and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the
driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.

1-34

What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module -- the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the
seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front
passenger’s side impact air bags -- will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.

CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but can’t get out of the
vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.

D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an

air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your
air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag
system won’t be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include air bag modules
and possibly other parts. The service manual for
your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.

D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and

diagnostic module, which records information about
the frontal air bag system. The module records
information about the readiness of the system, when
the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s
safety belt usage at deployment. Some modules also
record speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.

NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or
the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag
module and seatback for the driver’s and right
front passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.

D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.

1-35

Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and the
air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.

Adding Equipment to Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle

If I add a push bumper or bicycle rack to the
front of my vehicle, will it keep the air bags
from working properly?

As long as the push bumper or bicycle rack is
attached to your vehicle so that the vehicle’s basic
structure isn’t changed, it’s not likely to keep the
air bags from working properly in a crash.

Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the air bags
from working properly?

Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal
or height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this, you
should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. (The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See “Customer Satisfaction Procedure”
in the Index.)

CAUTION:
For up to two minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.

1-36

What if I add a snow plow? Will it keep the
air bags from working properly?

We’ve designed our air bag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions,
including snow plowing with vehicles equipped
with the optional Snow Plow Prep Package
(RPO VYU). But don’t change or defeat the
snow plow’s “tripping mechanism.” If you do,
it can damage your snow plow and your vehicle,
and it may cause an air bag inflation.

Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in the center positions.

Center Passenger Position

When you sit in a center seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt
longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.

1-37

Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear
seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough,
see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if you ever had to.

1-38

Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.

When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, it will
lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.

1-39

CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.

1-40

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide pulls the belt away
from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position in
the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort for
children who have outgrown child restraints and for
smaller adults, the comfort guides may be installed on
the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a comfort guide
and use the safety belt:

Second Row Seat

1-41

Third Row Seat
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of the
seatback. For the third row, remove the guide from
its storage clip on the side of the seatback.

1-42

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges
of the belt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.

Second Row Seat

1-43

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither
the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.

Smaller Children and Babies

CAUTION:

Third Row Seat
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in “Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions”
earlier in this section. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out from
the guides. Slide the guide onto the storage clip.

1-44

Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system
is designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always
be restrained in a child or infant restraint.
The instructions for the restraint will say
whether it is the right type and size for your
child. A very young child’s hip bones are so small
that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips,
as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would
apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which
could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure
that any child small enough for one is always
properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.

Infants need complete support, including support for
the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in
a rear-facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part
of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint.
This is so important that many hospitals today won’t
release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is
an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a
motor vehicle.

1-45

CAUTION: (Continued)
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.

CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in
a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much -- until a
crash. During a crash a baby will become so
heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)

1-46

Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.

What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?

Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight and
size, but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.

An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the
center of the vehicle.

1-47

A rear-facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in
a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two
parts -- the base stays secured in the vehicle and
the seat part is removable.

1-48

A forward-facing child restraint (C-E) positions
a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.
These forward-facing restraints are designed to
help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around
four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint,
is designed to be used either as a rear-facing infant
seat or a forward-facing child seat.

1-49

When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. The instructions that come with the infant or
child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the
owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are
important, so if either one of these is not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.

A booster seat (F) is designed for children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about
four to eight years of age. A booster seat is
designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety
belt system. Booster seats with shields use lap-only
belts; however, booster seats without shields use
lap-shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help
a child to see out the window.

1-50

Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your
child restraint in a rear seat. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat. Here’s why:

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle -- even when no child is in it.

Top Strap

CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before you do, always
move the front passenger seat as far back as it
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored.
In the United States, some child restraints also have a
top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should
be anchored.

1-51

Suburban/Yukon XL models without rear seats: Top
strap anchor loops are located at the bottom rear of the
front seat cushion for the right front passenger’s position.

Suburban/Yukon XL models with rear seats: A child
restraint with a top strap should only be used in the
second or third row. Don’t use a child restraint with a
top strap in the front seat because there’s no place to
anchor the top strap.
An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position
in the second row, and for the right outside seating
position in the third row.

Suburban/Yukon XL Models Without Rear Seats
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the
top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child
restraint itself.
Suburban/Yukon XL Second Row Seat

1-52

Suburban/Yukon XL Third Row Seat
Utility models: A child restraint with a top strap should
only be used in the second row. Don’t use a child
restraint with a top strap in the right front passenger’s
position or in the third row, because there’s no place to
anchor the top strap.

Utility Second Row Seat
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the
top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child
restraint itself.

An anchor loop bracket for a top strap is located at the
bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position
in the second row.

1-53

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-54

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out
of the retractor to set the lock.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Rear Seat Position

5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
If you’re using a forward-facing child restraint, you
may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on
the child restraint as you tighten the belt.

You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.

6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

See the earlier part about the top strap if the child
restraint has one.

1-55

1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.

1-56

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you
push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger
child passenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position

Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position

Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
Don’t use child restraints in this position. The restraints
won’t work properly.

1-57

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face
or neck, put it behind the child restraint.

Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.

1-58

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into the
retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.

1-59

Larger Children

If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the
safety belts properly.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out
in a crash.

D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other
people who are.

Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

1-60

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed
together and seriously injured. A belt must be
used by only one person at a time.

What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is
very close to the child’s face or neck?

Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide. If the
child is sitting in a rear seat outside position, see
“Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” in the Index.
If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still
very close to the child’s face or neck, you might
want to place the child in a seat that has a lap belt,
if your vehicle has one.

1-61

CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wears the belt in this way,
in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on
the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-62

Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. The extender will
be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach
it to the regular safety belt.

Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.

Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at
the time of the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system
earlier in this section.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)

1-63

Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you have a problem.
2-2
2-3
2-7
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
2-15
2-17
2-18
2-22
2-27
2-28
2-30
2-31
2-31

Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Theft
Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
PasslockR
New Vehicle “Break In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Operation
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust

2-32
2-33
2-34
2-34
2-34
2-36
2-43
2-46
2-48
2-55
2-62
2-65
2-66
2-68
2-69
2-82

Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
Level Control (If Equipped)
Autoride (If Equipped)
Locking Rear Axle
Windows
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Storage Compartments
HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped)
OnStarR System (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel - Your
Information System
Instrument Panel Cluster
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
Message Center

2-1

Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t
leave the keys in a vehicle with children.

2-2

Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for the
ignition and all door locks.

Door Locks
CAUTION:

Your vehicle may also have
a key that locks and unlocks
the center floor console
only (if equipped).

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers -- especially children -- can easily
open the doors and fall out. When a door is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lock your doors, and you will be far
better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Use the keyless entry system (if equipped) or use the
door key.
You can also use your key.

If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.

2-3

From the inside, to lock
the door, slide the lever
rearward. To unlock the
door, slide the lever forward.

Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the raised side of the
switch, marked “L” on
either front door to lock
all the doors at once.

Press the recessed side of the switch marked “U” to
unlock all the doors at once.

2-4

If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of the
switch on either front door
to lock all the doors at once.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors at once.
On the passenger side of the
rear cargo door or liftgate
opening trim there is a
power lock switch which
can be used to lock or
unlock all of the doors.

If the rear lock switch is pressed with the rear doors
open, all of the doors will lock five seconds after the
cargo doors are closed.
The power door locks will operate at any time without
the ignition being on.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See “Content
Theft-Deterrent” in the Index.

Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an auto lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your power
door locks.
Your vehicle left the factory programmed to have the
automatic lock feature lock all the doors when the
vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) for
two seconds, and then unlock all the doors once the key
is removed from the ignition. The following instructions
detail how to program your door locks.

To enter the program mode you need to:
1. Beginning with the ignition in OFF, pull back on the
turn signal/multifunction lever all the way toward
you and hold it while you perform the next step.
2. Turn your key to ON and OFF twice. Then, with the
key in OFF, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the following four programming
options and follow the instructions. You will have ten
seconds to begin programming. If you exceed the ten
second limit, the locks will automatically lock and
unlock to indicate you have left the program mode.
If this occurs, repeat the procedure beginning with
step 1. You can exit the program mode any time by
turning the ignition to ON (the locks will automatically
lock and unlock to indicate you are leaving the
program mode). If the lock/unlock switches are not
pressed while in the programming mode, the auto
lock/unlock setting will not be modified.

2-5

The following is a list of the available programming options:

D All doors lock/Only the driver’s door unlocks:

Press the lock side of the power lock switch on the
door panel once and then the unlock side once.

Lockout Prevention
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.

D All doors lock/All doors unlock: Press the lock side

If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.

D All doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the

Child Security Locks (If Equipped)

of the power lock switch on the door panel once, and
then the unlock side twice (this is the factory setting).
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
once, and then the unlock side three times.

D No doors lock/None of the doors unlock: Press the
lock side of the power lock switch on the door panel
twice. This turns off the automatic lock feature.

With this feature, you can
lock the rear side doors so
they cannot be opened from
the inside by passengers.

For more information, see your dealer.

Move the button forward to engage the security feature.
Move the button rearward to return the door locks to
normal operation.

2-6

Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock
your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m)
away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by other than an
authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

D Check the distance. You may be too far from your

vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.

D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.

D Check to determine if battery replacement or

resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions
that follow.

D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.

2-7

Operation

Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle

UNLOCK: Pressing this button once will unlock the
driver’s door. The parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will come on. The ground illumination
lamps will come on if so equipped. Pressing UNLOCK
again within three seconds will cause the remaining
doors to unlock. The parking lamps will flash and the
interior lights will come on.

Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any
remaining transmitters with you when you go to your
dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters
matched to it.

LOCK: Pressing this button once will lock all of the
doors. Wait one second, then press LOCK again and the
horn will chirp.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact
with the theft-deterrent system. See “Content-Theft
Deterrent” in the Index.
Remote Panic Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the keyless
entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the
headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to 30 seconds.
This can be turned off by pressing the horn button again,
waiting for 30 seconds, or starting the vehicle.

2-8

Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.

NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch
any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter:

1. Insert a dime in the slot between the covers of the
transmitter housing near the key ring hole. Remove
the bottom by twisting the dime.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery, positive (+) side up.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by this system. The transmitter does not
send the same signal twice to the receiver. The receiver
will not respond to a signal that has been sent
previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to your
vehicle and press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for seven
seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.

2-9

Liftgate Caution
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors open because carbon
monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the liftgate glass, liftgate
or rear doors open or if electrical wiring or other
cable connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate glass, liftgate
or rear doors:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the setting
on MAX A/C. That will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls”
in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.

2-10

Liftgate Glass and Liftgate
To open a mechanical lock system from the outside,
insert the key into the lock and turn it counterclockwise
to unlock the glass and liftgate.
The liftgate glass can be opened using the pushbutton on
the liftgate after the doors have been unlocked. This can
be done by using either the power door locks or the
remote keyless entry system.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in the
center of the door.
To lock a power lock system from the outside, insert the
key into the lock button and turn clockwise. All doors will
lock. You may also use the keyless entry system or the
power door locks to lock the liftgate and liftgate glass.

Panel Doors
To open the rear panel doors, you must open the
passenger’s side panel door first. If the door is locked,
insert your door key in the lock and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
To open the passenger’s side panel door, pull on the
handle and pull the door open.

To open the driver’s side panel door, first open the
passenger’s side door. Then, pull the handle on the left
door edge out and pull the door open.

Your steering wheel will be locked, and so will your
ignition and transmission. Also remember to lock
the doors.

To close the doors, close the driver’s side door first.
After securely closing the door, close the passenger’s
side door. Make sure both doors are latched securely.

If the key is in the ignition, with any door open, and you
try to lock your doors with the power door locks, the
driver’s door will not stay locked. This will help to keep
you from locking your keys in the vehicle.

To lock the rear doors from outside the vehicle, put your
key in the lock and turn it clockwise. If you have power
door locks, you can lock the side doors as well as the rear
doors from inside the vehicle. For more information,
see “Power Door Locks” earlier in this section.

Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.

Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an
easy target for joy riders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
When you park your vehicle and open the driver’s door,
you’ll hear a chime reminding you to remove your key
from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this.

Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.

Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key? What if
you have to leave something valuable in your vehicle?

D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your
glove box.

D Valuables can be locked in the center floor console.
D If your vehicle has a remote keyless entry system,
take the transmitter with you.

D Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
2-11

Content Theft-Deterrent (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Content
Theft-Deterrent alarm system.
With this system, the
SECURITY message will
flash as you open the door
(if your ignition is off).

This message reminds you to activate the theft-deterrent
system. Here’s how to do it:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch or the
remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY
message should come on and stay on. If using the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the door does not
need to be open.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY message should go
off after approximately 15 seconds. The alarm is not
armed until the SECURITY message goes off.

2-12

If a door is opened without the key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about
two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key or use the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock
switch with the door open, or with the remote keyless
entry transmitter. You should also remember that you
can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the
alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:

D If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent

system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.

D Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote

keyless entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm if the system has been armed.

If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door
with the key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing
UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.

Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY message to go out.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by an
authorized service center.

PasslockR
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with a
valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition lock
cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the SECURITY message flashes,
wait until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the SECURITY message
comes on, you will be able to restart the engine if you
turn the engine off. However, your Passlock system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock at this
time. You may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses
and Circuit Breakers” in the Index). See your dealer
for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.

2-13

New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the
long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or
less for the first 500 miles (805 km).
D Don’t drive at any one speed -- fast or
slow -- for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.

2-14

Ignition Positions
You can use your key to turn your ignition switch to five
different positions.

ACCESSORY (A): ACCESSORY lets you use things
like the radio, power windows and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. Push in the key and turn it toward
you. Your steering wheel will remain locked, just as it
was before you inserted the key.
LOCK (B): This position locks your ignition, steering
wheel and transmission. It’s a theft-deterrent feature.
You will only be able to remove your key when the
ignition is turned to LOCK.

OFF (C): This position lets you turn off the engine but
still turn the steering wheel. It doesn’t lock the steering
wheel like LOCK. Use OFF if you must have your
vehicle in motion while the engine is off (for example,
if your vehicle is being pushed).
RUN (D): This is the position for driving.
START (E): This position starts your engine.

NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the
ignition switch. If none of this works, then your
vehicle needs service.

Retained Accessory Power (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow
certain features on your vehicle to continue to work up
to 20 minutes after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Your radio, power windows and overhead console will
work when the ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY.
Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF, these features
will continue to work for up to 20 minutes or until a
door is opened.

Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.

NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle
is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when
your vehicle is stopped.

2-15

1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.

NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it doesn’t start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help
avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.

2-16

When starting your engine in very cold weather (below
0_F or -18_C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there. When the
engine starts, let go of the key. Use the accelerator
pedal to maintain engine speed, if you have to, until
your engine has run for a while.
2. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try pushing
your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
holding it there as you hold the key in START for about
three seconds. When the engine starts, let go of the
key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly but then
stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the
pedal down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.

NOTICE:

Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather,
0_F (-18_C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater
can help. You’ll get easier
starting and better fuel
economy during engine
warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be
plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting
your vehicle.

Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed,
see the part of this manual that tells how to do
it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

2-17

CAUTION:

Automatic Transmission Operation

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach,
use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store
the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving
engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.

2-18

There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator within
the instrument panel cluster. This display must be
powered anytime the shift lever is capable of being
moved out of PARK (P). This means that if your key is
in OFF, rather than LOCK, there will be a small current
drain on your battery which could discharge your battery
over a period of time. If you have to leave your key in
the ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you remove the IGN 0 fuse from the
instrument panel fuse block. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index.

PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’s the best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.

CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)

CAUTION: (Continued)
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll -- even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) -- if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N). So, be sure the transfer case is in
a drive gear, two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel
high (4H) or four-wheel low (4L) -- not in
NEUTRAL (N). See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in
the Index. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing
a Trailer” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is
moving forward could damage your transmission.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.

2-19

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)
when your two-wheel drive vehicle is being towed.

CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed)
is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit people
or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.

2-20

NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you’re:

D Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.

D Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.

You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal
driving, however it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you would also want to use
your brakes off and on.
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can
use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is
moving forward, the transmission won’t shift into first
gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.

NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with only the accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
On cold days, approximately 32_F (0_C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.

2-21

Tow/Haul Mode Selector Switch

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive. See the
appropriate text for the transfer case in your vehicle.

NOTICE:
Driving in the 4-WHEEL HIGH (4H) or
4-WHEEL LOW (4L) positions for a long time
on dry or wet pavement could shorten the life
of your vehicle’s drivetrain.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow/haul mode. The
selector switch is located on the end of the column shift
lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or
hauling a heavy load. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the
Index for more information.

The Tow/Haul Mode also interacts with the Autoride
feature, if your vehicle is so equipped, to enhance the ride
when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See “Autoride ”
in the Index.

2-22

Front Axle Locking Feature
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to
lock or unlock is normal.

Automatic Transfer Case (If Equipped)
The transfer case switches
are located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.

Use these switches to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.

You can choose among four driving settings:
2HI: This setting is used for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best
fuel economy.

2-23

AUTO 4WD: This setting is ideal for use when road
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the vehicle
senses a loss of traction, the system will automatically
engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this mode results in
slightly lower fuel economy than 2HI.
4HI: Use 4HI when you need extra traction, such as
on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
This setting also engages your front axle to help drive
your vehicle. This is the best setting to use when
plowing snow.
4LO: This setting also engages your front axle and
delivers extra torque. You may never need 4LO. It sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
4LO if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow and climbing or descending steep hills.

2-24

CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). You or someone else could be
seriously injured. Be sure to set the parking
brake before placing the transfer case in
NEUTRAL. See “Parking Brake” in the Index.
NEUTRAL: Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to NEUTRAL
only when towing your vehicle. See “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” or “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index for
more information.
Indicator lights in the switches show which setting you are
in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not
come on, you should take your vehicle to your dealer for
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the
transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is
complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.

If the SERVICE 4WD light stays on, you should take
your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD” in the Index for further information.
Shifting to 4HI or AUTO 4WD
Press and release the 4HI or AUTO 4WD switch. This can
be done at any speed (except when shifting from 4LO),
and the indicator light will flash while shifting. It will
remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
Shifting to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI switch. This can be done at
any speed (except when shifting from 4LO).
Shifting to 4LO
To shift to 4LO, the ignition must be in RUN and the
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
The preferred method for shifting into 4LO is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
Press and release the 4LO switch. You must wait for
the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission in gear.

If the 4LO switch is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds and not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will return to the setting last chosen.
Shifting Out of 4LO
To shift from 4LO to 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI your
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(4.8 km/h) with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and
the ignition in RUN. The preferred method for shifting
out of 4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI switch. You must wait for the 4HI, AUTO
4WD or 2HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear.
If the 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 2HI switch is pressed
when your vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the 4HI,
AUTO 4WD or 2HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless your
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (4.8 km/h) and the
transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).

2-25

Shifting to NEUTRAL

Shifting Out of NEUTRAL

To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL, first make sure
the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll:

To shift out of NEUTRAL:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn the
ignition to RUN with the engine off.

2. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
3. Connect the vehicle to the towing vehicle.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal.

3. Press the button for the desired transfer case shift
position (2HI, 4HI, AUTO 4WD or 4LO).

5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI.

4. After the transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL
the red light will go out.

6. Simultaneously press and hold the 2HI and 4LO
buttons for 10 seconds. The red NEUTRAL light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.

5. You may start the engine and shift the transmission
to the desired position.

7. Shift the transmission to REVERSE (R) for one
second, then shift the transmission to DRIVE (D)
for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to OFF.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Release the parking brake prior to towing.

2-26

Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake
pedal with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
flash. A chime will activate when the parking brake is
applied and the vehicle is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
for at least three seconds.

To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, marked BRAKE
RELEASE, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.

NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows
what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-27

Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. With four-wheel drive if your
transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle
will be free to roll, even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear -- not in NEUTRAL (N). If you’re
pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.

2-28

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:

D Pull the shift lever toward you.

Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running

CAUTION:

D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not
in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the
engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. If you have
four-wheel drive and your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL (N). And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t
leave your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.

2-29

If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
move the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular
brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift
lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it
toward you. If you can, it means that the shift lever
wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).

2-30

Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transmission” in
the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to the OFF ignition position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the vehicle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Over Things That Burn

Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:

CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

2-31

Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if
ever you have to, here are some things to know.

CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust -- with
CO -- can come in easily. NEVER park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in NEUTRAL (N) will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not in
NEUTRAL (N). Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in
the Index.

2-32

Level Control (If Equipped)

Automatic Level Control

Self-Adjusting

The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride suspension.

The self-adjusting rear suspension is available on
C/K 1500 vehicles and is available with the premium
smooth ride suspension package.
This type of level control will provide a leveled riding
position as well as improved handling under a variety of
passenger and loading conditions. A hydraulic pump inside
each rear shock absorber raises the rear of the vehicle to
the proper height, based on inputs from the road surface,
while the vehicle is being driven. It takes approximately
2 miles (3.2 km) of driving for the leveling to complete,
depending on the road surface conditions.
If the loaded vehicle is not moved for approximately
twelve hours, the leveling system may bleed down to a
lower height. This can be especially apparent is a trailer
is left attached to a parked vehicle for long periods of
time. The vehicle must be driven to re-level the vehicle.

This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to
maintain proper vehicle height. The system is activated
when the ignition key is turned to RUN and will
automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter. The
system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned to
OFF. You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, it is recommended
to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby leveling the vehicle
prior to adjusting the hitch.

If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, the vehicle
should be driven approximately 2 miles (3.2 km) with
the trailer prior to adjusting (leveling) the hitch.

2-33

Autoride

t (If Equipped)
t

The Autoride feature will provide a superior vehicle
ride and handling under a variety of passenger and
loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride also interacts with the Tow/Haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index for more information.

Locking Rear Axle
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.

2-34

Windows
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to raise or lower
manual windows.

Power Windows (If Equipped)
If you have the optional power windows, the controls
are located on each of the side doors.

The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is present.
See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.
Press the rear of the switch with the power window
symbol on it to lower the window or the front to raise it.
The driver’s window also has an express down feature
that allows the window to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the rear of the window switch
for one second to activate the express down mode.
The express down mode can be canceled at any time
by pressing the opposite side of the switch. To open the
window partway, lightly tap the switch until the window
is at the desired position.
If you have power windows, the power window switch has
a lockout feature. This feature prevents the rear windows
from operating except from the driver’s position when the
front driver’s side button labeled WINDOW LOCK is
engaged. When the button is not engaged, the rear power
windows will operate again.

Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.

Tilt Wheel (If Equipped)
The tilt steering wheel
allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before
you drive.

You can also raise it to the highest level to give your
legs more room when you enter and exit the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever located on the lower left of the column. Move the
steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the
lever to lock the wheel in place.

2-35

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.

The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes your:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control

2-36

To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by
itself when you release it.
If you move the lever all the way up or down, and the
arrow flashes at twice the normal rate, a signal bulb
may be burned out and other drivers may not see your
turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you
signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown
fuse (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index).

Flash-To-Pass Feature

Turn Signal On Chime

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, but not
so far that you hear it click.

If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn
signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever
to the off position.

Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low to high beam or high
to low beam, pull the multifunction lever all the way
toward you. Then release it.

This feature allows you to use your high-beam
headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you
want to pass. It works even if your headlamps are off.

If your headlamps are off or on low-beam, your
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on
as long as you hold the lever toward you and the
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel will
come on. Release the lever to turn the high-beam
headlamps off.

When the high beams
are on, this light on the
instrument panel also
will be on.

2-37

Windshield Wipers

For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go. The wipers will
stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed for a long or short delay
between wipes. This can be very useful in light rain
or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.
The closer to LO, the shorter the delay.
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop the wipers, move
the band to the OFF position.

You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.

2-38

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer
There is a paddle marked with the windshield washer
symbol at the top of the multifunction lever. To spray
washer fluid on the windshield, push the paddle. The
wipers will clear the window and then either stop or
return to your preset speed.

Rear Window Washer/Wiper
This switch is located on the
instrument panel.

CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the switch to either
1 or 2. For long delayed wiping, turn the switch to 1.
For short delayed wiping, turn the switch to 2. To turn
the wiper off, turn the switch to 0.
To wash the window, press the knob.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle
as the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield
washer. If you can wash your windshield but not
your rear windows, check the fluid level.

2-39

Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not
work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).

If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will disengage.

2-40

CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you

can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t
use your cruise control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Don’t use cruise
control on slippery roads.

Setting Cruise Control

CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You
could be startled and even lose control. Keep the
cruise control switch off until you want to use
cruise control.

United States

Canada

The CRUISE light on the instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed

1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, disengages
the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to
R/A briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you continue to hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster,
don’t hold the switch at R/A.

2-41

Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control

Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control

There are two ways to go to a higher speed:

Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.

D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal. You’ll
now cruise at the higher speed.

D Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it

there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control

D Press and hold the SET button at the end of the

lever until you reach the lower speed you want,
then release it.

D To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET

button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

D Step lightly on the brake pedal.
D Move the cruise control switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.

2-42

Exterior Lamps

Turn the knob clockwise to the master lamps symbol to
turn on all the lamps listed as well as the headlamps.
Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn
off your lamps and put the system into automatic
headlamp mode.
Rotate the thumbwheel next to the knob up to adjust
instrument panel lights. Rotate the thumbwheel up to
the first notch to return the radio and gearshift indicator
LED display to full intensity when the headlamps or
parking lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps, with
the vehicle doors closed, rotate the thumbwheel up to
the second notch position.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pulling on the turn signal/high-beam lever.

Your parking lamp and headlamp switch is on the
driver’s side of your instrument panel.
Turn the knob clockwise to the parking lamps symbol to
manually turn on:

D
D
D
D
D

A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.

Parking Lamps

Automatic Headlamp System

Sidemarker Lamps

When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as the
taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the instrument
panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.

Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights

2-43

Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille. Be
sure it is not covered, or the system will be on whenever
the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.

Lamps On Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition
is in OFF, LOCK or ACCESSORY. To disable the
chime, rotate the thumbwheel all the way down. In the
automatic mode, the headlamps turn off once the
ignition key is in OFF.

There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems
so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.

Daytime Running Lamps

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, set the parking brake while the ignition is
off. Then start your vehicle. The automatic headlamp
system will stay off until you release the parking brake.

D
D
D
D
D

As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp
System. See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” later in
this section for more information.

2-44

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system will come on when:
the ignition is on,
the headlamp switch is in automatic headlamp mode,
the automatic transmission is not in PARK (P),
the light sensor determines it is daytime and
the parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on.
The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.

When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps or the
last chosen headlamp setting that was used.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
To idle an automatic transmission equipped vehicle with
the DRL off, set the parking brake. Shifting the
transmission into PARK (P) will also allow you to idle
the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay off
until you release the parking brake or shift the
transmission out of PARK (P).
The following procedure applies only to vehicles first
sold in the United States, and it does not apply to some
early production vehicles.
When necessary, you may turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System and the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) feature by
following the steps below. When system is turned off the
headlights will not automatically come on when it becomes
dark outside. As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when you need it.
1. With the ignition in the RUN position.
2. Press the DOME OVERRIDE button four times
within six seconds. A chime will sound informing you
the Automatic Headlamp System and Daytime
Running Lamps are off.

3. The system will revert back to the automatic mode
when the DOME OVERRIDE button is again pushed
four times within six seconds (chime will sound), or
when the ignition is turned off and on again.

Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
If you have fog lamps, use them for better vision in foggy
or misty conditions. Your parking lamps and/or low-beam
headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp switch is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.

Press the switch to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
switch again to turn them off. An indicator light will
glow in the switch when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in
the dark without turning on your headlamps.

2-45

The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.

If your vehicle has this switch, your vehicle may have
the Snow Plow Prep Package. For further information
see “Snow Plow Prep Package” in the Index.

The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp switch again.

Interior Lamps

Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch
(If Equipped)
This switch includes wiring
provisions for a dealer or a
qualified service center to
install an auxiliary roof
lamp. This switch is located
on the center of the
instrument panel near
the comfort controls.

Instrument Panel Intensity Control
The instrument panel intensity control is located to the
right of the headlamp switch.
Rotate the thumbwheel up to increase the intensity of
the instrument panel lights. To turn on the dome lamps,
with the vehicle doors closed, rotate the thumbwheel all
the way up. Rotate the thumbwheel down to decrease
the intensity of the lights.

Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will
not come on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is
pressed in.

Illuminated Entry
When the switch wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the button will activate the lamp
and illuminate an indicator light near the button. Pressing
the button again will turn off the roof mounted lamp.

2-46

Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the DOME OVERRIDE button is in the “out”
position. If the DOME OVERRIDE button is pressed in,
the lamps will not come on.

Front Reading Lamps (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has reading
lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to
turn them on. The lamps
can be adjusted to point in
the direction you want.

Press the button again to turn the lamp off.

Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by rotating the
thumbwheel, located next to the parking/headlamps
knob, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
You can use the DOME OVERRIDE button, located
below the parking/headlamp knob, to set the dome
lamps to come on automatically when a door is opened,
or remain off. To turn the lamps off, press the button
into the “in” position. With the button in this position,
the dome lamps will remain off when the doors are
open. To return the lamps to automatic operation, press
the button again and return it to the “out” position.
With the button in this position, the dome lamps will
come on when you open a door.

Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome, reading, glove box
and underhood lamps if they are left on for more than
20 minutes when the ignition is off. This will keep your
battery from running down.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn on or off, press the button located next
to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.

2-47

Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Rearview Mirror

Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.

2-48

Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass (If Equipped)
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.

The mirror also includes an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on, the
compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is driven.

Compass Operation
Press the COMP switch once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on, the
compass will show two character boxes for approximately
two seconds. After two seconds, the mirror will display the
compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Compass Calibration
Mirror Operation
The right button located at the bottom of the mirror turns
the electrochromic mirror on and off. The LED, located
to the right of the button, will come on when the
electrochromic mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror on,
press and hold the MIRROR button for three seconds.
The mirror will darken and remain dark until the button is
released. To turn the mirror off, press and release the
MIRROR button.

The compass may need calibration if:

D After five seconds, the display does not show a

compass heading (“N” for North, for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering with
the compass. Such interference may be caused by a
magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder
or a similar magnetic item.

D The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.

2-49

In order to calibrate, the letter “CAL” must be
displayed in the mirror compass windows. If “CAL”
is not displayed, push in the “COMP” button for
approximately eight seconds or until the letter “CAL”
is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:

D Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or

To adjust for compass variance:
1. Press and hold the COMP button, located at the
bottom of the mirror, for three seconds until a zone
number appears in the display.
2. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.

less until the display reads a direction, or

D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after

several turns the compass will become calibrated and
will display a direction.

Compass Variance
The compass is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust for compass variance. Compass variance is the
difference between earth’s magnetic north and true
geographic north. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2-50

Electrochromic Inside Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature Display
(If Equipped)
When on, an electrochromic mirror automatically dims
to the proper level to minimize glare from lights behind
you after dark.

Temperature Display

The mirror also includes a display of both the compass
and the temperature in the upper right corner of the
mirror face. The dual display can be turned on or off by
briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.

Pressing the TEMP button once briefly will toggle the
compass/ temperature reading on and off. To alternate
the temperature reading between Fahrenheit and Celsius,
press and hold the TEMP button for three seconds until
the display blinks F_ and C_. Press and release the
TEMP button to toggle between the Fahrenheit and
Celsius readings. After five seconds of inactivity, the
display will stop flashing and stay at the last setting.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult
your dealer.

2-51

Electrochromic Mirror Operation

Compass Calibration

The right side of the button, labeled TEMP and located
at the bottom of the mirror, turns the electrochromic
mirror on and off. An indicator light, located to the
right of the TEMP button, will come on when the
electrochromic mirror is turned on. To turn the mirror
on, press and hold the TEMP button for 15 seconds.
To turn the mirror off, press and hold the TEMP button
for 15 seconds. The indicator light will turn off.

The compass may need calibration if:

Compass Operation
With the ignition on, the compass will show two character
boxes. The mirror will display the compass heading.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

D After five seconds, the display does not show a

D The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.

In order to calibrate, the letter “CAL” must be displayed in
the mirror compass windows. If “CAL” is not displayed,
push in the “COMP” button for approximately eight seconds
or until the letter “CAL” is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated in one of two ways:

D Drive the vehicle in circles at five mph (8 km/h) or
less until the display reads a direction, or

D Drive the vehicle on your everyday routine and after

several turns the compass will become calibrated and
will display a direction.

2-52

Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. Compass variance is the difference
between earth’s magnetic north and true geographic
north. If not adjusted to account for compass variance,
your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Use the COMP button located at the bottom of
the mirror.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for three seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Find your current location and variance zone number
on the following zone map.

4. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button in, the display will
show a compass direction within a few seconds.

2-53

Outside Manual Adjust Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the side of
your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind you.
The mirrors can be folded in to enter narrow doorways.

Electric Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
The control is located on the
driver’s door armrest.

The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect
mirror performance.

Camper-Type Outside Mirrors (If Equipped)

Move the upper control to the left or right to choose the
mirror you want to adjust, then press the arrows on the
lower control pad to adjust the mirror.

Heated Outside Rearview Mirrors
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view of
objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.

2-54

The outside rearview mirrors with this option feature a
defrost mode.
To turn on the defrost feature, press the rear window
defogger button. See “Rear Window Defogger” in the
Index for further information.

Convex Outside Mirror

Cupholders

Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the
driver’s seat.

Your vehicle has cupholders in the middle of the
instrument panel, in the rear armrests and at the back
of the center console for rear passengers.

Center Console Storage Area (If Equipped)

CAUTION:

Your vehicle may have a console compartment between
the bucket seats.

A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.

Storage Compartments
Your vehicle has a variety of storage compartments
designed to store small items.

Glove Box
To open your glove box, move the switch toward the
passenger’s side and pull the door open.

To open it, insert the console key into the lock and
unlock the console. Press the button and swing the
console lid open.

2-55

The console has a place to store coins, tissues, pens and
a clip to hold business cards.
Your console may have a cupholder that swings down
for the rear seat passengers to use and may have a
compact disc holder.

Rear Storage Compartment
Your vehicle has a storage compartment located in the rear
cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s side trim panel.
To open the utility compartment, press in on the release
latch and swing the compartment door open.

Armrest Storage Compartment
(If Equipped)

To open the Suburban/Yukon XL compartment, pull the
latch to access.

Your vehicle may have a center armrest storage
compartment in the front bench seat.

Cargo Security Shade

To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let the
lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment has a cassette/compact disc
holder. The holder will store up to six compact disc
cases and five cassette tape cases or a total of eleven
cassette tape cases.
If not used to store cassette or compact disc cases, the
storage area can be used to store a laptop computer.
The storage compartment also has a folding writing
table on top of the armrest lid.
To use the writing table, pull the latch at the rear of the
table and swing the writing table forward. Use it to hold
pads of paper and a pen.

2-56

CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it outside of the vehicle. When you put it back,
always be sure that it is securely reattached.
If you have a cargo security shade, you can use it to
cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle.

To use the shade, pull the shade handle toward the rear
of the vehicle. Latch the shade posts into the retaining
sockets on the cargo area trim panels.
To return the shade to the retracted position, pull up on
the shade handle to release the shade posts from the
retaining sockets. Let the shade move forward to the full
retracted position.
To remove the shade from the vehicle, first let the
shade go all the way into the holder. Then, grasping the
passenger’s side shade endcap, push the shade endcap
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle. The endcap
should lock in the compressed position. Lift the shade
up on the passenger’s side, swing the shade rearward
and take it out of the vehicle.
To put the shade in the vehicle, first make sure the shade
slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface
facing down. Then, hold the shade at an angle and place
the shade holder tab into the slot in the driver’s side trim
panel. Move the other end of the shade forward and hold
it next to the passenger’s side trim panel slot.

Push the button on top of the passenger’s side endcap.
This will allow the shade to extend into the trim slot.
Lightly pull on the shade holder to make sure it is
secure. On Suburban/Yukon XL models there are
two slots. The slots furthest forward allow the shade
to be used if the third seat is removed or folded down.

Cargo Tie Downs
There are cargo tie downs in
the rear cargo area that
allow you to strap cargo in
and keep it from moving
inside the vehicle.

When not using the tie downs, flip them down out of
the way.

2-57

Convenience Net (If Equipped)
You may have a convenience net in the rear of your
vehicle to help keep small loads, like grocery bags, in
place during sharp turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.

Luggage Carrier (If Equipped)
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things on
top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached to
the roof and crossrails which can be moved back and
forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the siderails or
siderail supports.

2-58

NOTICE:
Loading cargo that weighs more than 200 lbs.
(90.6 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle. When you carry large things, never
let them hang over the rear or the sides of your
vehicle. Load your cargo so that it rests on the
slats and does not scratch or damage the vehicle.
Put the cargo against the siderails and fasten it
securely to the luggage carrier.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and cargo
are still securely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.

D If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place

the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind the
rear side door on Suburban/Yukon XL Models).
If you need to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit
inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load.
If plywood is used, tie it to the siderail supports.

D Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.

Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.

D If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails

as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.

D For the purpose of wind noise reduction, locate

the front crossrail approximately 18 to 24 inches
(46 cm to 58 cm) rearward of the front supports.

Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear
load doors.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care should
be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.

Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Front Ashtray
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel. Pull on the bottom of the ashtray
door to open it.

NOTICE:
If you store paper or other things that burn in
your ashtrays, they could be set on fire by
cigarettes or other smoking materials. That could
cause a fire and possibly damage your vehicle.
Do not store papers and other things that burn
in your ashtrays.

D After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.

2-59

To remove the front ashtray, press the retainer spring
and pull the ashtray toward you. To replace the ashtray,
place the ashtray on the slides at the side of its location
in the instrument panel. Then slide the ashtray back to
its original position.

Accessory Power Outlets

To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and let
go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.

NOTICE:
Holding a cigarette lighter in with your hand
while it’s heating can make it overload, damaging
the lighter and the heating element. Just push the
lighter all the way in and let go. When it’s done,
it will pop back by itself.

Two accessory power outlets are located near the
cigarette lighter. Use these outlets to power mobile
telephones or other devices designed to operate with
vehicle electrical systems.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle to the right of the accessory power outlets.
Power outlets are also located in the rear cargo area on
the passenger side and in the rear of the center floor
compartment (if equipped with rear seat audio). To use
the outlets, remove the cover by lifting the pull tab.
When not in use, always cover the rear outlet with the
protective cap.

2-60

To block out glare, you can swing down the top and
bottom visors (if equipped). You can also swing the
bottom visor from side-to-side. Your visors may
have an extension that can be pulled out for additional
glare protection.

Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the glass
panel and sunshade. To close the glass panel, press and
hold the front of the button. The glass will not be fully
seated unless the button is held until the glass stops
moving. With the sunroof closed, press the forward side
of the button to open the sunroof to the vent position.

Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)

The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which you
can pull forward to block sun rays.

Pull the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn
on the lamps. There is a slide switch to adjust the
intensity of the lamps.

If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop at
the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed, the
glass panel can be closed or opened.

Sun Visors

Sunroof (If Equipped)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition or
RAP needs to be on. See “Retained Accessory Power”
in the Index.

Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracts.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is not
working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof. To do
this, start the vehicle and press the forward side of the
sunroof switch until the glass panel moves to a fully
closed position. Release, and press again to move to the
vent position which occurs when the sunroof is fully
tilted rearward. This will reset the memory and enable
the sunroof to function properly.

2-61

HomeLinkR Transmitter (If Equipped)

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.

Programming the Transmitter
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-62

Do not use the HomeLinkR Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door you are programming.

Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter
channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down
the two outside buttons on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.
This procedure initializes the memory and erases any
previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to
program. Hold the end of the hand-held transmitter
about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13 cm) away from the
surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you
can still see the indicator light.
3. Using both hands, press the hand-held transmitter
button and the desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through
Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the light on
the HomeLink Transmitter flash rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates that the HomeLink Transmitter has
been programmed. Release both buttons once the
light starts to flash rapidly.

If you have trouble programming the HomeLink
Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the
directions exactly as described and that the battery in the
hand-held transmitter is not dead. If you still cannot
program it, rotate the hand-held transmitter end over end
and try again. The HomeLink Transmitter may not work
with older garage door openers that do not meet current
Federal Consumer Safety Standards. If you cannot
program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to
“Training a Garage Door Opener with Rolling Codes”
later in this section or contact the manufacturer of the
unit at 1-800-355-3515.
Be sure to keep the original hand-held transmitter
in case you need to erase and reprogram the
HomeLink Transmitter.
Canadian Owners: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case,
you should press and re-press the button on the
hand-held transmitter every two seconds without ever
releasing the button on the HomeLink Transmitter.
Release both buttons when the indicator light on the
HomeLink Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.

2-63

Operating the Transmitter

Press and hold the appropriate button on the HomeLinkR
Transmitter. The indicator light comes on while the signal
is being transmitted.
If the hand-held transmitter appears to program the
HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage
door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured
after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling
code” system. A rolling code system changes the code
of the garage door opener every time you open or close
the garage door.
To determine if you have this system, press the
button on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have
programmed already. If the indicator light flashes
rapidly for one to two seconds, then turns solid, the
garage door opener has a rolling code system. In a
rolling code system, the garage door motor head unit
must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.

Training a Garage Opener with a “Rolling
Code” Feature (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand-held

transmitter to the HomeLinkR Transmitter, see
“Programming the Transmitter” listed previously.
If you have completed this programming already, you
now need to train the garage door opener motor head
unit to recognize the HomeLink Transmitter. Refer to
your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper
transmitter training procedure for your garage door
opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. The exact location and color will
vary by garage door opener brand. If you have
difficulty finding the training button, refer to your
garage door opener owner’s manual.
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener
motor head unit. An indicator light will begin to flash
when the motor head unit enters the training mode.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start
Step 3.

2-64

3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicle
and firmly press and release the HomeLink
Transmitter button you have already programmed for
two to three seconds. Press and release the button
again (you may need to do this step up to three times)
to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter has been
trained to the garage door opener motor head unit.
Check that the training was successful. The motor
head unit indicator light should no longer be flashing.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the
HomeLink Transmitter or the hand-held transmitter
to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have
problems training the garage door opener, call the
manufacturer of the unit at 1-800-355-3515.

Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the
two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

Accessories

Accessories for the HomeLinkR Transmitter are
available from the manufacturer of the unit. If you
would like additional information, please call
1-800-355-3515.

OnStarR System (If Equipped)
OnStar is a vehicle communications service. The
following services are available through a subscription
with OnStar and are available 24 hours a day:
Emergency Services

D
D
D
D
D
D

Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Stolen-Vehicle Tracking
Roadside Assistance with Location
Remote Diagnostics
OnStar MED-NET
Accident Assist

Convenience Services

D
D
D
D

Remote Door Unlock
Route Support
Concierge Services
Ride Assist

A complete user’s guide is provided with the OnStar
System. For more information, contact OnStar
1-888-ONSTAR7.

2-65

The Instrument Panel - Your Information System

2-66

A. Dome Lamp Switch

K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block

B. Lamp Controls

L. Hood Release

C. Air Outlets

M. Center Instrument Panel Utility Block

D. Automatic Transfer Case/Traction Assist System
(If Equipped)

N. Tilt Lever (If Equipped)

E. Multifunction Lever

P. Lighter and Accessory Power Outlets

F. Instrument Cluster

Q. Rear Window Defogger Switch (If Equipped)

G. Gearshift Lever

R. Storage Area or Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)

H. Tow/Haul Selector Switch

S. Ashtray

I. Audio System

T. Glove Box

O. Parking Brake Release

J. Comfort Control System

2-67

Instrument Panel Cluster

United States Heavy Duty Transmission version shown.
Canada and Light Duty Transmission clusters are similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.

2-68

Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
Press the reset button to toggle between the trip
odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for two seconds while the trip odometer is
displayed will reset it.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The odometer can also display the number of hours the
engine has run. To display the hour meter, turn the
ignition off, press and hold the reset button for at least
four seconds. The hour meter will be displayed for up to
30 seconds, or until the ignition is turned on.

Tachometer
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).

Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.

2-69

Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a driver information system
that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See “Message Center” in the Index.

Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime
will come on for about six seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 20 seconds,
then it will flash for
about 55 seconds.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.

2-70

Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the
air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on
when you start your vehicle,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.

Voltmeter

CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Canada

When your engine is not running, but the ignition is in
RUN, this gage shows your battery’s state of charge in
DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.

2-71

Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.

Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.

You can only drive for a short time with the reading in
either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off all
unnecessary accessories.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.

Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash
if the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to
drive with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound
when the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).

2-72

United States

Canada

This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition
key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle”
in the Index.)

Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal.

CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you
don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you don’t have anti-lock brakes
and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See
“Brake System Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

2-73

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

United States

Canada

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210_F (100_C) or less. If you are pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250_F (122_C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260_F (125_C) mark, it indicates that
the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
The “Problems on the Road,” section of this manual shows
what to do. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.

2-74

Transmission Temperature Gage (If Equipped)

United States

Canada

If your vehicle has a heavy duty automatic transmission,
you will have a transmission temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the temperature
of the transmission fluid. The normal operating range is
from 100_F (38_C) to about 265_F (130_C).
At approximately 265_F (130_C), the message center
will display a TRANS FLUID HOT message and the
transmission will enter a transmission protection mode.
When the transmission enters the protection mode, you
may notice a change in the transmission shifting patterns.
The transmission will return to normal shifting patterns
when the transmission fluid temperature falls below
260_F (127_C).

See “Message Center” in the Index for further information.
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275_F (135_C) or greater, the message
center will display a TRANS HOT...IDLE ENG warning
message. Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe
to do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260_F (127_C).
If the transmission continues to operate above 265_F
(130_C), please contact your nearest dealer or the
GM Roadside Assistance Center.

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above the
normal operating range, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to costly repairs
that may not be covered under your warranty.

The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).

A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures on
a frequent basis, see “Scheduled Maintenance” in the
Index for the proper transmission maintenance intervals.

2-75

Low Traction Light

Traction Off Light
If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
will come on when the
system is limiting wheel
spin. See “Traction Assist
System” in the Index.

You may feel or hear the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.
The LOW TRACTION light also comes on briefly when
you turn your ignition to RUN. If the light doesn’t come
on then, the system may require service; have it fixed so
it will be there to tell you when the Traction Assist
System is active. Slippery road conditions may exist if
the LOW TRACTION light comes on, so adjust your
driving accordingly.

2-76

If you have the Traction
Assist System, this light
should come on briefly
when you turn the ignition
to RUN.

If the light doesn’t come on then, the system may
require service; have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if the system is turned off.
If the TRACTION OFF light stays on, or comes on
when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your
Traction Assist System and your vehicle may need
service. When this light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

The TRACTION OFF light may come on for the
following reasons:

D If you turn the system off by pressing the TAS on/off

Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light in the United
States or Check Engine Light in Canada)

button located to the left of the steering wheel, the
light will come on and stay on. To turn the system
back on, press the button again; the light should
go off.

D If you move the shift lever to FIRST (1), the light

will come on and stay on to indicate that the Traction
Assist System is off. This is normal operation. To
turn the system back on, move the shift lever back to
a position other than FIRST (1); the light should go
off. See “Traction Assist System” in the Index.

D The light will come on and stay on if the TAS

automatic engagement feature has been turned off.
To turn the system on, press the TAS off/on button;
the light should go off. To turn the automatic
engagement feature back on, see “Traction Assist
System” in the Index.

D If the Traction Assist System is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the light will come on. Have your vehicle serviced.

United States

Canada

Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to assure
that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is
required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the
system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent
more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.

2-77

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, after a while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not be as
good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.

This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one
of two ways:

D Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been

detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.

D Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.

NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transmission,
exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the
replacement of the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or CHECK ENGINE light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by your warranty.
This may also result in a failure to pass a
required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.

2-78

If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been
left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you put
the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration
or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go
away once the engine is warmed up.) This will be
detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.

2-79

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs

Oil Pressure Gage

Some state/provincial and local governments have or may
begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could
prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is
on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This may take several days of routine
driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still
does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to
prepare the vehicle for inspection.

2-80

United States

Canada

The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running.
Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing
low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as possible. See
“Check Eng Oil Pressure” and “Engine Oil” in the Index.

Cruise Light (If Equipped)

CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
United States

NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil
problems can be costly and is not covered by
your warranty.

Canada

The CRUISE light comes on whenever you set your
cruise control. See “Cruise Control” in the Index.

Tow/Haul Light
This message is displayed
when the tow/haul mode has
been activated.

For more information, see “Tow/Haul Mode” in
the Index.

2-81

Here are some situations you may experience with your fuel
gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage.

Fuel Gage

D At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the
gage reads F (Full).

D It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the

fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to fill
the tank.

D The gage goes back to E (Empty) when you turn off
the ignition.

United States

Canada

The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate E (Empty) before you are
out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon
as possible.

2-82

Message Center
The message center is located on the left side of the
instrument panel cluster. It gives you important safety
and maintenance facts. When you turn the ignition on,
the entire center lights up for just a few seconds.
As needed, the message center will display one of the
following messages. The message center is capable of
alternating among different messages if needed.

BATTERY

TRANS FLUID HOT
If this message is displayed
when the engine is running,
you may have a problem
with your charging system.

If you have an automatic transmission, you have a
transmission temperature warning display contained in
the message center.
If the transmission fluid
temperature becomes high,
the message center will
display this message.

The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the message stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this message displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this message
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories,
such as the radio and the air conditioner.

When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS FLUID HOT message
displayed, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not
be covered under your warranty.

2-83

The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Towing a trailer

TRANS HOT...IDLE ENGINE
Your vehicle has a transmission over-temperature
display contained in the message center.

Hot outside air temperatures

If this warning message is
displayed, pull the vehicle
off the roadway when it is
safe to do so.

Hauling a large or heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).

Set the parking brake and place the transmission in
PARK (P). Idle the engine until the message center no
longer displays a message. If idling the engine does not
turn the warning message off after 10 to 15 minutes,
contact your nearest dealer or the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See “Roadside Assistance” in the Index.

NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with the
transmission TRANS HOT...IDLE ENGINE
message displayed, you can damage the
transmission. This could lead to costly repairs
that may not be covered under your warranty.

2-84

The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures

LOW COOLANT
This message is displayed
when the cooling system is
low on coolant.

Hauling a heavy load
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).

The engine may overheat. See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index and have your vehicle serviced as soon as you can.

CHECK COOLANT TEMP
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets hot.

Check the coolant temperature gage and the coolant
level. See “Engine Coolant” and “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index for further information.

2-85

ENGINE OVERHEATED
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot.

This message will be displayed after the air conditioning
system has automatically turned off for the engine
coolant protection mode. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index for further information.

REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed
when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot
and the engine further
enters the engine coolant
protection mode.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index for
further information.

2-86

CHECK ENG OIL PRESSURE
This message is displayed
when the engine oil pressure
is low.

See “Oil Pressure Gage” in the Index for more information.

CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL
This message is displayed
when the engine oil level
is low.

Once oil is added, it may need time to drain and settle in
the engine before this message will turn off. It is best to
let the engine cool down (if it is hot) or warm up (if it is
cold) and cycle the ignition to be sure this message turns
off. Refer to the dipstick for the correct level.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index on how to check the oil
level and for what type of oil to add.

CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed
when the engine oil needs
to be changed. The message
is only displayed for
15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle.
When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the
Engine Oil Life System. See “Engine Oil, When to
Change” in the Index.

SECURITY
This message is displayed
when the content
theft-deterrent system
has been activated and
also monitors the
PasslockR System.
If the security message is displayed continuously while
driving and stays on, there may be a problem with the
Passlock System. Your vehicle will not be protected by
Passlock, and you should see your GM dealer.

SERVICE 4WD (If Equipped)
If the SERVICE 4WD
message comes on, there
may be a problem with the
automatic transfer case and
service is required.

Malfunctions can be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent, which may prevent serious damage
to the vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your
service technician in correctly diagnosing a malfunction.

LOW WASHER FLUID
This message is displayed
when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid.
The message is only
displayed for 15 seconds
each ignition cycle.
For more information, see “Windshield Washer Fluid” in
the Index.

2-87

SERVICE RIDE CONTROL

LOW FUEL

This message is displayed
when a possible problem
exists with the Autoride
system if equipped.

For more information, see “Autoride ” in the Index.

CARGO DOOR AJAR
This message is displayed
when the rear liftglass,
liftgate or panel doors
are ajar when the ignition
is in RUN.

2-88

This message is displayed
when your vehicle is low
on fuel.

Refer to the fuel gage for a better indication of the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3-2
3-3
3-5
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15

Comfort Controls
Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls (If Equipped)
Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)
Air Conditioning
Heating
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Ventilation System
Audio Systems
Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Setting the Clock for Systems with HR
and MN Buttons
AM-FM Stereo

3-17
3-19
3-24
3-28
3-29
3-31
3-34
3-34
3-35
3-37
3-37
3-37

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)
Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
Fixed Mast Antenna

3-1

Comfort Controls

Mode Knob

Standard Comfort Controls

The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
VENT: This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
The air flow can be divided between VENT and
HEATER depending upon where the knob is placed
between the settings.

Fan Knob
The knob on the left side of the control panel adjusts the
fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise.
To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise. To turn
the fan off, turn the knob to OFF.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer
air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue area
for cooler air.

3-2

HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets, and the rest
of the air is divided between the windshield defroster
outlets and the side window defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater
floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the
side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be
divided between HEATER and DEFROST depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the heater outlets.

Heater and Air Conditioning Comfort
Controls (If Equipped)

Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
PANEL: This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.

BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the
instrument panel outlets and the heater floor outlets.
The air flow can be divided between PANEL and
HEATER depending upon where the knob is placed
between the settings. Pressing the A/C button while
in this mode causes cooler air to come out of the
instrument panel outlets and warmer air to come out
of the heater floor outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets as well as
some air through the windshield defroster outlets and
side window defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is delivered through the heater
floor outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the
side window defroster outlets. The air flow can be
divided between HEATER and DEFROST depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify
the air to prevent window fogging.

3-3

DEFROST: This setting directs most of the air
through the windshield defroster outlets, side window
defroster outlets and some air through the heater outlets.
When in the DEFROST mode, the air conditioning
compressor may run to dehumidify the air to prevent
window fogging.

In the BLEND mode, outside air is forced to reduce
window fogging. If the RECIRCULATION button is
pressed, the LED indicator will flash three times
indicating that forced outside air is activated and
RECIRCULATION is not available.

OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to direct
the system to use outside air. This is the setting which
should be used for normal operation.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.

D the air conditioning system is activated,
D the OUTSIDE AIR button is on, and
D the vehicle load is high due to city traffic, extended

RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amount of fresh outside air entering your vehicle.
This is helpful when you are trying to limit odors
entering your vehicle or attempting to quickly cool
down the interior. Pressing RECIRCULATION will
recirculate air continuously.

The system will automatically switch to the recirculation
mode to lower the system load and improve interior
comfort. The OUTSIDE AIR and RECIRCULATION
button LEDs will not change. The system will return
to the OUTSIDE AIR function when the system load
is reduced.

RECIRCULATION is used when the fan control is OFF
to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering your
vehicle. All button lights will go off. The last setting
selected will activate when the blower is turned back on.

A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on.

Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel
the OUTSIDE AIR button. To return to normal
operation and to prevent stale air, be sure to return
to OUTSIDE AIR.

3-4

The auto recirculation feature will activate when:

idling or hot weather.

Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level at which
air conditioning is effective.

Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)

When both the Fan Control and Mode Knobs are in
the AUTO position, the system will then automatically
maintain the desired cabin temperature as selected by
Temperature Knob. Manual control of functions is
also available.
Temperature Knob

Fan Control
The knob on the left side of the electronic climate
control panel controls the fan speed. To manually
increase airflow, move the knob clockwise. To manually
decrease airflow, move it counterclockwise.
OFF: If the knob is in OFF, outside air will still enter
the vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob.
AUTO: If the knob is in AUTO, the fan speed will vary
as the system maintains the selected temperature.

The middle knob on the control panel lets you select
the desired air temperature in your vehicle. This knob
will allow you to adjust the interior air temperature
independent of the function knob setting. Move the
knob clockwise toward 82 for warmer air. Move the
knob counterclockwise toward 66 for cooler air. When
the system is set for automatic operation, sensors will
control the fan/blower speed.
Full Hot: If you turn the temperature knob past
82_F (28_C), the system will go into the “full hot”
mode. The system will remain at that maximum heating
setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is
set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.
Full Cold: If you turn the temperature knob past
66_F (19_C), the system will go into the “full cold”
mode. The system will remain at that maximum cooling
setting and the fan will blow at the speed the fan knob is
set to. If the fan is in AUTO, it will run at full speed.

3-5

Mode Knob - Automatic Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery. When the system is
set for automatic operation, sensors will control the air
delivery mode. Air will come primarily from the floor or
instrument panel outlets, with some air directed to the
windshield to prevent fogging.
When the system is in AUTO mode, the air conditioning
light will turn on, and the recirculation and outside air
lights turn off. With the system in full auto control
(both the fan and mode knobs in AUTO), you still
have the ability to override any function. However,
continually overriding the outside air or the A/C
compressor will limit the ability of the system to cool
the vehicle quickly.
If you push a button for a function which is not
available, the light next to that button will flash three
times to alert you that it’s not available.
To find your comfort zone, start with the 74_F (23_C)
setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to
adjust the temperature if necessary.

3-6

With the automatic setting, the air conditioning
compressor automatically cycles when needed to cool the
air. In cold weather, when the system senses the need
for heat, the airflow will be directed out the floor outlets.
As the interior temperature approaches a desired setting,
the blower speed will decrease. To maintain interior
comfort, the airflow will adjust between the instrument
panel air outlets and floor outlets. On bright sunny days
in cool weather, the airflow may come out of the air
conditioning and floor outlets (bi-level mode) to maintain
comfort and prevent stuffiness.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the outside air
temperature, engine coolant temperature or the time
since the engine was last started. As the coolant warms
up, the blower fan speed will gradually increase and
air will flow from the heater outlets, with some airflow
to the windshield to prevent fogging under most
normal conditions.
Be careful not to put anything over the solar sensor
located around the center of the instrument panel.
This sensor is used by the automatic system to
regulate temperature.

Mode Knob - Manual Operation
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
You can choose to set the climate control system
operations yourself, or let the system work for you
by placing the system in AUTO mode. See “Mode
Knob - Automatic Operation” earlier in this section.
PANEL: This setting directs most of the air
through the instrument panel outlets and a small amount
through the floor outlets.
BI-LEVEL: Air is delivered through the heater
floor outlets as well as the instrument panel outlets.
HEATER: This setting directs most of the
warmed air through the heater floor outlets and some
air through the windshield defroster outlets.
BLEND: Airflow is divided equally between the
heater floor outlet and the windshield defroster outlets.
The air conditioning compressor may run to dehumidify
the air to prevent window fogging.
DEFROST: This setting directs most air through
the windshield defroster outlets and some through the
heater outlets. The air conditioning compressor may
run to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.

OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to force
the system to use outside air. Press it again to close off
the outside air.
Pressing the OUTSIDE AIR button will cancel the
RECIRCULATION button.
RECIRCULATION: Press this button to limit
the amount of fresh air entering your vehicle. This is
helpful when you are trying to limit odors entering your
vehicle or attempting to quickly cool down the interior.
In the AUTO mode, the system will use recirculation
as necessary to cool the air. Pressing the recirculation
button will change the operation to a manual mode and
the air will recirculate non-stop. Press this button again
to turn off the recirculation feature.
RECIRCULATION may be selected with the fan control
in OFF to limit odors, outside air and dust from entering
your vehicle.
Pressing the RECIRCULATION button will cancel the
OUTSIDE AIR button.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning
on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air
inside the vehicle when the A/C light is on. When in AUTO,
the A/C is automatically engaged when necessary.

3-7

Air conditioning will be automatically disabled when
the outside temperature drops below a level which air
conditioning is ineffective.

To increase and decrease the flow of cooled air to the rear
vents, turn the rotary knob to the blower speed you want.

Remember that in order for the automatic system to perform
well, it needs A/C to provide cooling performance.

The knob has three speed positions. To increase the flow
of cooled air, turn the switch toward 3. To decrease the
flow of cooled air, turn it toward 1. To turn the fan off,
turn the knob to OFF.

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
(If Equipped)

To operate the rear system using the front control,
just turn the knob to the blower position you want.

If your vehicle has one of these systems, you can increase
and decrease the airflow at the rear vents. Depending on
the system you have and the setting selected, you can
send cooled or heated air to the rear of the vehicle.
Rear Air Conditioning (Without Rear Heater)
(If Equipped)

To use the rear control, first turn the front control knob
to REAR. Then, the rear control can be used to increase
and decrease the airflow.

3-8

Rear Air Conditioning and Rear Heater
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has the rear air conditioning and rear
heater system combination, controls are provided to
regulate temperature, location and speed of the airflow.

Generally, the upper vents are used for air conditioning
and the floor vents for heating. The control knob can be
set to any blend setting.
To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the center of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward the red,
and for cooler air, turn the knob counterclockwise.

Front Control
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan control knob
located on the left side to the desired blower setting.
To activate the second seat control system, turn the fan
knob on the front overhead control to REAR.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent
airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow.

Rear Control
The rear control works just like the front control. It will
allow second seat passengers to adjust the controls as
they desire. To use the rear control, first turn the front
control knob to REAR.

3-9

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Systems
with Electronic Climate Control System
(If Equipped)

With this system the rear passengers can control the
temperature of the air flow for his/her own zones.
The climate control has three controls.
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan control knob
located on the left side of the control panel to the desired
blower setting.
The system also has a front AUTO setting that can
automatically change the temperature of the rear seating
area based on information from the front control. An
OFF setting, located on the front climate control panel,
also allows the driver to turn off the rear passenger seat
controls from the front seat.

Front Control

To adjust the air temperature, turn the temperature knob
on the center of the control panel.
For warmer air, turn the knob clockwise toward the red.
Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue for
cooler air.
To regulate the airflow location, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor vent
airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent airflow.
Generally, the upper vents are used for air conditioning
and the floor vents for heating. The control knob can be
set to any blend setting.

Rear Control

3-10

For rear control operation, use the above instructions.

Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
air inside escape. This reduces the time it takes for your
vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed
for the air conditioner to work its best.
The RECIRCULATION button allows the air inside
your vehicle to be recirculated. This setting helps to
maximize your air conditioner’s performance and your
vehicle’s fuel economy. This setting also cools air the
fastest and can be used to keep unwanted odors
and/or dust from entering the vehicle. When using
the air conditioner, turn off the RECIRCULATION
button after the vehicle reaches a comfortable interior
temperature. When the right knob on the control panel
is between HEATER and DEFROST, the recirculation
feature will not function to reduce window fogging.

The A/C button, below the mode knob, allows the air
coming into your vehicle to be cooled. This setting is
useful for normal cooling on hot days. When you use
A/C with the RECIRCULATION button pushed in,
turn off recirculation as soon as the vehicle reaches a
comfortable interior temperature.
Maximum air conditioning performance is obtained by
pressing the A/C button, the RECIRCULATION button
and turning the temperature knob fully counterclockwise
to the blue area. This setting also cools air the fastest.
After the vehicle’s interior reaches a comfortable
temperature, press the OUTSIDE AIR button to
place the air conditioning system in the normal mode.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has air conditioning, it is equipped
with a passenger compartment air filter, which filters
outside air entering the vehicle. For information on
replacing the filter see “Passenger Compartment
Air Filter” in the Index.

3-11

Heating

Defogging and Defrosting

The heater works best if you keep your windows
closed while using it. On cold days, use the HEATER
or VENT/HEAT setting with the temperature knob in
the red area.

On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the
windshield and side windows clear. Use DEFROST to
remove fog or ice from the windshield in extremely
humid or cold conditions. Use DEFROST with the
temperature knob toward the red area and the fan
control turned all the way to the right.

On cold days, approximately 32_F (-0_C) or lower, if
your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission,
you may experience differences in how the transmission
shifts until the engine is warm. This feature automatically
reduces the time it takes for the engine to reach normal
operating temperature and shortens the time it takes the
heater to reach full output.
If you use the engine coolant heater before starting your
engine in cold weather, 20_F (-8_C) or lower, the
heating system will produce warmer air faster to heat the
passenger compartment.
The use of an engine coolant heater also reduces the
time it takes for the engine to reach normal operating
temperature. For more information, see “Engine Coolant
Heater” in the Index.

3-12

Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
If you see lines running across the rear window, you
have a rear window defogger. The lines warm the glass.
To turn on the rear window
defogger, press this button
located next to the fan
control knob.
The rear window defogger
will only work if the
ignition is in RUN. For best
results, clear the window
of as much snow or ice
as possible first.

The defogger will shut itself off after several minutes.
If you need additional warming time, press the button
again. You can turn the defogger off at any time by
pressing the button.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated outside mirrors,
the rear window defogger button will also activate the
heated outside mirrors.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals
across the defogger grid on the rear window.

NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade or something else sharp
on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.

Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
cooling is needed, use VENT to direct outside air
through your vehicle. Air will flow through the
instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s ventilation system supplies outside air
to the inside of your vehicle when it is moving. With
the side windows closed, air will flow into the front
air inlet grilles, through the vehicle, and out the air
exhaust valves.
Outside air will also enter the vehicle when the heater
or the air conditioning fan is running, unless you have
the RECIRCULATION button pushed in. For more
information on the RECIRCULATION button,
see “Air Conditioning” earlier in this section.

3-13

Your vehicle has air outlets
in the center and on the
sides of the instrument
panel and also may be
equipped on the headliner.

Ventilation Tips

D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). The heater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.

D When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the

blower fan all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts of
snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.

D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
You can turn the outlets from side-to-side or up
and down to direct the flow of air. The left driver
and passenger outlets on vehicles equipped with air
conditioning have shut off knobs. Turn the knob to
the left to shut off air flow, to the right to allow air flow.
When you close an outlet, it will increase the flow of air
coming out of any outlets that are open. The center
outlet does not completely shut off airflow.

3-14

objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.

D The use of hood air deflectors may adversely
affect the performance of the heating and air
conditioning system.

Audio Systems

AM-FM Stereo

Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how
to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the
most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.

Setting the Clock for Systems with
SET Button
Press SET. Within five seconds, press and hold the
SEEK right arrow until the correct minute appears on
the display. Press and hold the SEEK left arrow until
the correct hour appears on the display.

Setting the Clock for Systems with HR
and MN Buttons
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on
the display. Press and hold MN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the clock with the
ignition off, press RECALL or HR/MN and the time
will be displayed for a few seconds. There is an initial
two-second delay before the clock goes into the
time-set mode.

Playing the Radio
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume and turn the radio off.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the recall knob. When the radio is playing,
press this knob to recall the station frequency.
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM and FM. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.

3-15

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next higher
station and the left arrow to tune to the next lower
station and stay there.
SCAN:Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to listen to a few seconds of
each radio station. SCAN will light up on the display.
The radio will automatically SCAN to the next higher
station, play that station for a few seconds, then SCAN
to the next higher station. Press VOLUME or both
SEEK buttons to stop scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
14 stations (seven AM and seven FM). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-16

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
(If Equipped)

Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between
AM, FM1 and FM2.
TUNE: Turn the lower knob to tune in radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
21 stations (seven AM, seven FM1 and seven FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

Playing the Radio

3. Tune in the desired station.

VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the radio
on, turn the knob clockwise. Turn it counterclockwise to
decrease volume and turn the radio off.

4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this knob. When the radio is playing, press this
knob to recall the station frequency.

5. Press one of the four pushbuttons within five
seconds. Whenever you press that numbered button,
the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

3-17

In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset on each band by pressing
two adjoining buttons at the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
3. Press two adjoining buttons at the same time,
within five seconds. Whenever you press the same
two buttons, the station you set will return.
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
P.SCAN: Select either AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and
press both SEEK buttons to scan through each of your
preset stations. The system will scan through and play
each preset station stored on your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. Press either SEEK button or RECALL to stop
scanning through the preset stations.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
TREB: Slide this lever up or down to increase or
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.

3-18

Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knob to move
the sound to the left or right speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knob to move
the sound to the front or rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
Once the tape is playing, use the knobs for VOLUME,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB just as you do for
the radio.
REV: Press the SEEK left arrow to reverse the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK right arrow to stop
reversing the tape.
FWD: Press the SEEK right arrow to advance the
cassette tape. Press the SEEK left arrow to stop
forwarding the tape.
RECALL: Press this knob to switch tape sides.

EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape or stop
the tape and play the radio.

AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:

Playing the Radio

1. Turn the radio on.

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of being rotated continuously.

2. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot.
3. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing
that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.

This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

3-19

SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed-Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Turn the control ring behind the upper
knob clockwise to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.

Finding a Station

3. Tune in the desired station.

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.

3-20

PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.

5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.

Adjusting the Speakers

FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

3-21

Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player.
To load a cassette tape with the ignition off, press
EJECT or RECALL. Then, insert the cassette tape.
If the ignition is on but the radio is off, the tape will
begin playing.
Once the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controls just as you
do for the radio. The tape symbol and a direction arrow
will be on the display whenever a tape is being played.
Anytime a tape is inserted, the top side is selected for
play first.
The player automatically senses if the cassette tape is
metal or CrO2 and adjusts for best playback sound.
PREV (1): Press the PREV button or the SEEK left
arrow to search for the previous selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation.

3-22

PROG (2): Press this button to switch from one side
of the tape to the other.
NEXT (3): Press the NEXT button or the SEEK
right arrow to search for the next selection. A minimum
three-second blank gap is required for the player to
stop at the beginning of the selection. The tape direction
arrow will blink during the SEEK operation. The sound
will mute while searching for the next selection.
REV (4): Press this button to rapidly reverse the tape
to the beginning of the cassette or until you press REV
again. The radio will play the last selected station while
reversing the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the reverse operation.

(5): Press this button to reduce cassette tape noise.
The double-D symbol will appear on the display while
the player is in this mode.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to rapidly forward the tape
to the end of the cassette or until you press FWD again.
The radio will play the last selected station while
forwarding the tape. The tape direction arrow will blink
during the forward operation.

AM-FM: Press this button to switch from a tape to
the radio.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to return to the tape
player when playing the radio. The lighted arrow will
appear and show the direction of play when a tape is in
the active mode.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The
radio will now play. EJECT can be used with either the
ignition or radio off. To load a cassette tape with the
ignition or radio off, press EJECT before loading
the cassette.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but
you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage
to the tapes and player. See “Care of Your Cassette Tape
Player” in the Index. After you clean the player, press and
hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLN indicator.
The radio will display --- to show the indicator was reset.

CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass
feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.

3-23

AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)

Playing the Radio

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display will show your selection.

PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on
and off. To increase volume, turn this knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume. The knob
is capable of rotating continuously.

TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it.

RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing this button. When the radio is playing, press
this button to recall the station frequency.

3-24

SEEK: Press the right arrow to tune to the next
higher station and the left arrow to tune to the next
lower station and stay there. The sound will mute
while seeking.

SCAN: Press and hold SEEK for two seconds until
SCAN appears on the display. SCAN allows you to
listen to stations for a few seconds. The receiver will
continue to scan and momentarily stop at each station
until you press the button again. The sound will mute
while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the setting you prefer.
5. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the tone you selected
will be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

P.SCAN: The preset scan button lets you scan through
your favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons.
Select either the AM, FM1 or FM2 mode and then
press P.SCAN. It will scan through each station stored
on your pushbuttons and stop for a few seconds before
continuing to scan through all of the pushbuttons.
Press P.SCAN again or one of the pushbuttons to stop
scanning to listen to a specific stored station. P.SCAN
will light up on the display while in this mode. If one
of the stations stored on a pushbutton is too weak for
the location you are in, the radio display will show the
channel number (P1-P6) for several seconds before
advancing to the next preset station.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase bass
and counterclockwise to decrease bass. When the BASS
control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the knob clockwise to increase
treble and counterclockwise to decrease treble. When
the TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE display
will go blank. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

3-25

AUTO TONE: Press this button to select among the
six preset equalization settings and tailor the sound to
the music or voice being heard. Each time you press the
button, the selection will switch to one of the preset
settings of CLASSIC, NEWS, ROCK, POP, C/W
(Country/Western) or JAZZ. To return to the manual
mode, press and release this button until the AUTO
TONE display goes blank. This will return the tone
adjustment to the BASS and TREB controls. If a
BASS or TREB control is rotated, the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust
sound to the right speakers and counterclockwise to
adjust sound to the left speakers. The middle position
balances the sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press lightly on this knob to release it from its
stored position. Turn the control clockwise to adjust the
sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the
rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound
between the speakers.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.

3-26

Playing a Compact Disc
PWR: Press this knob to turn the system on. (You can
also turn the system on when you insert a compact disc
into the player with the ignition on.)
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. Wait a few seconds and the disc
should play. CD and a CD symbol will also appear on
the display. Anytime you are playing a CD, the letters
CD will be next to the CD symbol.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:

D You are driving on a very rough road. (The disc
should play when the road gets smoother.)

D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour
and try again.)

D The disc player is very hot.
Press RECALL to make ERR go off the display.

PREV (1): Press PREV or the SEEK left arrow to
search for the previous selection. If you hold this button
or press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
Sound is muted in this mode.
RDM (2): Press this button to play the tracks on the disc
in random order. While in the RDM mode, RANDOM
appears on the display. Press RDM again to return to
normal play.
NEXT (3): Press NEXT or the SEEK right arrow to
search for the next selection. If you hold this button or
press it more than once, the disc will advance further.
The next track number will appear on the display.
Sound is muted in this mode.
REV (4): Press and hold REV to return rapidly to a
favorite passage. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the REV button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release REV to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to advance rapidly
within a track. You will hear the disc selection play at
high speed while you press the FWD button. This allows
you to listen and find out when the disc is at the desired
selection. Release FWD to resume playing.

RECALL: Press this button to see what track is playing.
Press it again within five seconds to see how long the
CD has been playing that track. Elapsed time is
displayed in minutes and seconds. The track number
will also appear when a new track begins to play. Press
RECALL again to return to the time display.
AM-FM: While in the CD mode, press this button to
stop playing the CD and play the radio. The CD symbol
will still display but the word CD will be replaced with
either AM, FM1 or FM2. (If the radio is turned off,
the disc stays in the player and will resume playing at
the point where it stopped.)
CD AUX: To switch between the player and the radio
when a disc is playing, press the AM-FM button.
To return to the player, press CD AUX. When a disc is
playing, the letters CD and the CD symbol will appear
on the display. (If the radio is turned off, the disc stays
in the player and will resume playing at the point where
it stopped.)
EJECT: Press this button to eject the disc from the
player and play the radio. When the same or a new
disc is inserted, the disc will start playing on track one.
If a compact disc is left sitting in the opening for more
than a few seconds, the player will pull the CD back in.
The radio will continue playing. When the ignition is
off, press this button to load a CD.

3-27

Rear Seat Audio (If Equipped)

PWR: Press this button to turn the rear seat audio
system on or off. The rear speakers will be muted
when the power is turned on. You may operate the
rear seat audio functions even when the primary radio
power is off.
VOL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob clockwise to increase volume and counterclockwise
to decrease volume. Push the knob back into its stored
position when you’re not using it. The upper VOL knob
controls the upper headphone and the lower VOL knob
controls the lower headphone.

This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the music sources including AM-FM, automatic tone
control, cassette tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat
passengers can only control the music sources that the
front seat passengers are not listening to. For example,
rear seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape through
headphones while the driver listens to the radio through
the front speakers. The rear seat passengers have control
of the volume for each set of headphones. Be aware that
the front seat audio controls always override the rear
seat audio controls.
Note that this feature is intended for rear seat passengers.

3-28

AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening to
AM-FM, the rear seat audio controller will not switch
between the bands and cannot change the frequency.
SEEK: While listening to AM-FM, press the up arrow
to tune to the next higher station and stay there. Press
the down arrow to tune to the next lower station and stay
there. The sound will mute while seeking. The SEEK
button is inactive if the AM-FM mode on the front
radio is in use.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up arrow to
hear the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow
to go back to the previous selection. The SEEK button is
inactive if the tape mode on the front radio is in use.

While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the
next selection on the CD. Press the down arrow to go
back to the start of the current selection (if more than
eight seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive
if the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
SCAN: Press and hold SEEK until the radio goes into
SCAN mode. SCAN allows you to listen to stations for
a few seconds. The receiver will continue to scan and
momentarily stop at each station until you press SEEK
again. The SCAN function is inactive if the AM-FM
mode on the front radio is in use.
P.SET PROG: The front passengers must be
listening to something different for each of these
functions to work:

D Press this button to seek through the preset radio
stations set on your primary radio pushbuttons.

D When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.

TAPE CD: With a cassette tape/CD in the player and
the radio playing, press this button to play a cassette
tape/CD. Press AM-FM to return to the radio when
a cassette tape/CD is playing. The inactive tape/CD will
remain safely inside the radio for future listening.

Remote Compact Disc Player (If Equipped)

If you have this option, you can play one compact
disc (CD) at a time.
To load a CD into the player, hold the disc with
the label side up and insert it carefully into the player
(approximately halfway). The disc will automatically be
pulled into the player. If the radio is off and the ignition
is on when a CD is inserted, the radio will turn on and
begin playing the CD. It is possible to load and unload
CDs with the ignition off. To load a disc with the
ignition off, press the EJECT button on the remote
player and then insert the disc. To remove the disc, press
the EJECT button and remove the disc from the player.

3-29

A disc that has been ejected but is still sitting in the
remote CD player will be pulled back into the player
after approximately 30 seconds. This protects the disc
and player from damage. The disc will not start playing.
To remove the disc, press the EJECT button and remove
the disc from the player.
All of the compact disc functions are controlled by the
radio buttons except for EJECT. When a disc is in the
player, a CD symbol will appear on the display. When a
disc is playing, the letters CD will appear next to the CD
symbol in the bottom left corner. The track number will
also be displayed.
If the disc comes back out and ERR appears on the
display, it could be that:
D The disc is upside down.
D It is dirty, scratched or wet.
D There’s too much moisture in the air. (Wait about
an hour and try again.)
D You are driving on a very rough road.
Please contact your dealership if any error recurs or
cannot be corrected.

3-30

PREV (1): Press this button to go back to the start
of the current track if more than eight seconds have
played. Press PREV again to go to the previous track
on the disc.
NEXT (3): Press this button to advance to the next
track on the disc.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to quickly reverse
within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
FWD (6): Press and hold this button to quickly advance
within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be
displayed to help you find the correct passage.
SEEK: Press the left arrow while playing a CD to
go back to the start of the current track. It will go
back to the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. Press the left arrow again to go to previous
tracks. Press the right arrow to go to the next higher
track on the disc.

RANDOM: Press P.SCAN to enter the random play
mode. RANDOM will appear on the display. While in
this mode, the tracks on the disc will be played in
random order. If you press SEEK, PREV or NEXT
while in the random mode, the previous or next track
will be scanned randomly. Press P.SCAN again to turn
off RANDOM and return to normal operation.
RECALL: Press this button to see what track is
currently playing. Press RECALL again within five
seconds to see how long the track has been playing.
When a new track starts to play, the track number will
also appear. Press RECALL a third time and the time
of day will be displayed.
TAPE AUX: With a disc loaded in the player and the
radio playing, press this button once to play the compact
disc. To return to playing the radio, press AM-FM.
If both a cassette tape and CD are loaded, press TAPE
AUX to switch between the tape and compact disc.

Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)

THEFTLOCKR is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery power is removed.
The THEFTLOCK feature for the radio may be used or
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it will operate.

EJECT: Press this button on the remote player to
eject a compact disc.

3-31

Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter
your secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system.
It is recommended that you read through all nine steps
before starting the procedure.
If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse between
any steps, the radio automatically reverts to time and
you must start the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will use the
secret code number which you have written down.

7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REP to let you know that you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that your radio is secure. The
LED indicator by the volume control will begin
flashing when the ignition is turned off.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition on. LOC will appear on the display.

5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.

6. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.

3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.

3-32

5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show SEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display. You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before you can try again. When you
try again, you will only have three chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.

4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
5. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree with
your code.
6. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show ---, indicating that the radio
is no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear on the
display. The radio will remain secured until the correct
code is entered.
When battery power is removed and later applied to a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio, see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier
in this section.

3-33

Understanding Radio Reception

To help avoid hearing loss or damage:

D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably

The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.

Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher
volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be
loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts to it.

3-34

and clearly.

NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle -- like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio -- be sure you
can add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.

Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN to indicate
that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without
resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears
on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be
cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as
soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and
player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a
known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape
player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement
in sound quality, clean the tape player.

The recommended cleaning method for your
cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through
your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassette to eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,
use the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.

3-35

If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio on.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the REV and
FWD buttons at the same time for three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash, showing
that the cut tape detection feature is no longer active.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash
for two seconds.

3-36

4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.

Care of Your Compact Discs

Fixed Mast Antenna

Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.

The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might be by vandals, you should
replace it.

Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl.

Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.

3-37

Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-3
4-6
4-6
4-9
4-11
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16

Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Traction Assist System (Option)
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle

4-31
4-32
4-35
4-36
4-37
4-38
4-38
4-40
4-44
4-46
4-51

Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Winter Driving
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer

4-1

Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never
know when the vehicle in front of you is going to
brake or turn suddenly.

Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)

4-2

Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task -- such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor -- makes proper defensive driving more
difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or
pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save
your life.

Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:

D
D
D
D

Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.

Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population -- choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.

The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety
problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then
drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much”
if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many
might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:

D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking

D The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.

According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.

4-3

Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all
commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.

It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.

4-4

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.

CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious -- or even
fatal -- collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.

4-5

Control of a Vehicle

Braking

You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.

Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up
your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or
gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the
vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.

Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy
to ask more of those control systems than the tires and
road can provide. That means you can lose control of your
vehicle. (Also see “Traction Assist System” in the Index.)

4-6

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is
used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.

Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS). ABS is
an advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You may
hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on. This is normal.
If there’s a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will stay
on. See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.

4-7

The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure faster
than any driver could. The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and road conditions.

Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.

You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.

As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.

4-8

Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise, but
this is normal. On vehicles with four-wheel drive, your
anti-lock brakes work at all times -- whether you are
in two-wheel drive or four-wheel drive.

Traction Assist System (Option)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Assist System (TAS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning
or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
This light will come
on when the TAS is
limiting wheel spin.
See “Low Traction Light”
in the Index.

Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same

You may hear or feel the system working or notice a
lack of accelerator response, but this is normal.

time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.

The Traction Assist System may operate on dry roads
under some conditions. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration. This is normal and
doesn’t mean there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration
in a turn, an abrupt upshift or downshift of the
transmission or driving on rough roads.

4-9

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the TAS begins
to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically
disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely
use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
See “Cruise Control” in the Index.
When the TRACTION OFF
light is on, the TAS is off
and will not limit wheel
spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.

The TRACTION OFF light will come on under the
following conditions:
D The Traction Assist System is turned off, either by
pressing the TAS on/off button or turning off the
automatic engagement feature of the TAS.
D The transmission is in FIRST (1); TAS will not
operate in this gear. This is normal.
D The vehicle is driven on a severely rough road.
When the vehicle leaves the rough surface, slows
down or stops, the light will go off and TAS will be
on again. This is normal.
D A Traction Assist System problem has been detected
and the vehicle needs service.

4-10

See “Traction Off Light” in the Index.
The Traction Assist System, as delivered from the
factory, will automatically come on whenever you start
your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery
road conditions, you should always leave the system on.
But you can turn the TAS off if you ever need to.
(You should turn the TAS off if your vehicle ever gets
stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your
Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system on or off
press the TAS on/off button
located to the left of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.

If you used the button to turn the system off, the
TRACTION OFF light will come on and stay on. You
can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the
button again. The TRACTION OFF light should go off.

If desired, you can change the TAS automatic
engagement feature so that the system will not come
on automatically when the engine is started. To do so:

Steering

1. Park vehicle with ignition off and transmission
in PARK (P).

If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.

2. Turn the ignition to RUN; do not start the engine.

Power Steering

3. Apply the brake pedal, press the accelerator pedal to
the floor and then press the TAS on/off button and
hold it down for at least six seconds.

Steering Tips

4. Release the TAS button and both pedals.

It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

5. Turn off the ignition and wait a few seconds.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:

The next time you start your vehicle, the TAS will not
automatically come on. You can restore the automatic
feature by using the same procedure. Whether the
TAS is set to come on automatically or not, you can
always turn the system on or off by pressing the TAS
on/off button.

Driving on Curves

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn
the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.

4-11

Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems -- steering and
acceleration -- have to do their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to
“Traction Assist System” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want
it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.

4-12

Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as you can from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left
or right depending on the space available.

Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.

An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter turn
until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.

4-13

Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:

D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and

to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.

D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid line,
even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.

4-14

D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass

while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.

D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,

start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down and drop back again and
wait for another opportunity.

D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check
the blind spot.

D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and

start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. (Remember that
if your right outside mirror is convex, the vehicle
you just passed may seem to be farther away from
you than it really is.)

D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.

D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.

D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the

following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.

Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.

4-15

A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you have the “Traction Assist
System,” remember: It helps avoid only the acceleration
skid. If you do not have this system, or if the system is
off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by
easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
your vehicle is skidding.

4-16

Learn to recognize warning clues -- such as enough
water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a
“mirrored surface” -- and slow down when you
have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see “Anti-Lock Brakes” in the Index.
If your vehicle doesn’t have four-wheel drive, you
shouldn’t drive off-road unless you’re on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is the
terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you’ve left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes aren’t
marked. Curves aren’t banked. There are no road signs.
Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or downhill.
In short, you’ve gone right back to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that’s
why it’s very important that you read this guide. You’ll
find many driving tips and suggestions. These will help
make your off-road driving safer and more enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can easily remove the
front bumper lower air dam.

The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push pins located around the lower edge of the
front bumper. The push-pins are accessible from
underneath the front bumper.

The following steps must be performed on each of the
push-pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert the blade portion
of a flat-blade
screwdriver into the
push-pin slot and pull
downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.

2. While continuing to
pull downward on the
push-pin, squeeze and
rotate the expandable
end of the push-pin
with a pair of pliers
until it releases from
the retainer.

4-17

3. Pull the push-pins and
lower air dam assembly
away from the retainers
until the lower air dam
is free.

To replace the lower air dam:
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended retainer
and push the washer
portion of the push-pin
towards the retainer until
it locks into place

When you’re back on roads, though, be sure to replace
the air dam.

NOTICE:
Operating your vehicle for extended periods
without the front bumper lower air dam installed
can cause improper air flow to the engine and
may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the front of your vehicle to be damaged.
Always be sure to replace the front bumper
air dam when you’re finished off-road driving.

4-18

2. Push the flat end of the
push-pin towards the
retainer until it locks
into place, making sure
each is secure.

Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance and
service work done. Check to make sure all underbody
shields (if so equipped) are properly attached. Be sure
you read all the information about your four-wheel-drive
vehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel? Is the spare
tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levels up where they
should be? What are the local laws that apply to
off-roading where you’ll be driving? If you don’t know,
you should check with law enforcement people in the
area. Will you be on someone’s private land? If so,
be sure to get the necessary permission.

Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.

D The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.

D Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain doesn’t toss things around.

CAUTION:
D Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the

seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of
the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by flying
objects. Secure the cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof.
Keep cargo in the cargo area as far forward
and low as possible.

You’ll find other important information in this manual.
See “Vehicle Loading,” “Luggage Carrier” and “Tires”
in the Index.

4-19

Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognizes these concerns and urges
every off-roader to follow these basic rules for
protecting the environment:

D Always use established trails, roads and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.

D Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment -- shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses -- or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).

D Always carry a litter bag . . . make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.

D Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.

D Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

4-20

Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
You are much less likely to get bad surprises. Get
accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of any
blocked or closed roads.
It’s also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be
handy if you get stuck. But you’ll want to know how to
use it properly.

Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It’s a good idea to practice in an area that’s safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
driving skills. Here’s what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms, hands,
feet and body, you’ll need to respond to vibrations and
vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful
off-road driving. One of the best ways to control your
vehicle is to control your speed. Here are some things to
keep in mind. At higher speeds:

D you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.

D you have less time to react.
D you have more vehicle bounce when you drive
over obstacles.

D you’ll need more distance for braking, especially
since you’re on an unpaved surface.

CAUTION:
When you’re driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you’re driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.

Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain and its
many different features. Here are some things to consider.
Surface Conditions. Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud,
snow or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer
braking distances.
Surface Obstacles. Unseen or hidden obstacles can be
hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle you
if you’re not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are
hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even the rise and fall of
the terrain itself. Here are some things to consider:

D Is the path ahead clear?
D Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
D Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There’s more discussion of these subjects later.)

D Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?

4-21

When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands if
you’re not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you can’t control the vehicle as
well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it’s
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. You have to use your own good judgment about
what is safe and what isn’t.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious -- or even fatal -- accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
See “Drunken Driving” in the Index.

4-22

Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what your vehicle can and can’t do.
There are some hills that simply can’t be driven, no
matter how well built the vehicle.

CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can’t control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, don’t drive the hill.

Approaching a Hill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it’s
one of those hills that’s just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth,
constant incline with only a small change in elevation
where you can easily see all the way to the top.

On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near
the top, but you may not see this because the crest of
the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.

Driving Uphill

Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.

D Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the

D Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?

D Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?

D Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
won’t have to make turning maneuvers?

D Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your

Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
steering wheel.

D Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain

your speed. Don’t use more power than you need,
because you don’t want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.

D Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.

path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?

D What’s beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you don’t know. It’s the smart way
to find out.

D Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have

ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because they
are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.

CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.

4-23

D Ease up on your speed as you approach the top

What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can’t make it up the hill?

D Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more visible

If this happens, there are some things you should do,
and there are some things you must not do.
First, here’s what you should do:

of the hill.

to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

D Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to
let opposing traffic know you’re there.

D Use your headlamps even during the day. They make
you more visible to oncoming traffic.

CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.

D Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from
rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.

D If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).

D If your engine has stopped running, you’ll need to

restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking
brake still applied, shift the transmission to PARK (P)
and restart the engine. Then, shift to REVERSE (R),
release the parking brake, and slowly back down the
hill as straight as possible in REVERSE (R).

D As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand

on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position. This
way, you’ll be able to tell if your wheels are straight
and maneuver as you back down. It’s best that you
back down the hill with your wheels straight rather
than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel
too far to the left or right will increase the possibility
of a rollover.

4-24

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

D Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to “rev-up” the engine and regain
forward momentum. This won’t work. Your vehicle
will roll backwards very quickly and you could go
out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R),
release the parking brake, and slowly back
straight down.

D Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to
stall your vehicle, it’s steep enough to cause you to
roll over if you turn around. If you can’t make it up
the hill, you must back straight down the hill.

Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just can’t do it.
What should I do?

Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL (N) when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.

CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N) can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P). This is because the NEUTRAL (N)
position on the transfer case overrides the
transmission. You or someone else could be
injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle,
set the parking brake and shift the transmission to
PARK (P). But do not shift the transfer case to the
NEUTRAL (N) position. Leave the transfer case
in the 2 Wheel High, 4 High or 4 Low position.

4-25

Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you’ll want to

Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?

consider a number of things:
D How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
D What’s the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
D Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?
Logs? Boulders?
D What’s at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a low
gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes and
they won’t have to do all the work. Descend slowly,
keeping your vehicle under control at all times.

Yes! These are important because if you ignore them
you could lose control and have a serious accident.

CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply
the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use
a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control.

4-26

D When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you

across the incline of the hill. A hill that’s not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive across.
You could roll over if you don’t drive straight down.

D Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and could
overheat and fade.

Q:
A:

Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
It’s much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here’s what to do.

D Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.

D Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.

D Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.

D If the engine won’t start, get out and get help.

Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to decide
whether to try to drive across the incline. Here are some
things to consider:

D A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be

too steep to drive across. When you go straight up or
down a hill, the length of the wheel base (the distance
from the front wheels to the rear wheels) reduces
the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.
But when you drive across an incline, the much more
narrow track width (the distance between the left and
right wheels) may not prevent the vehicle from tilting
and rolling over. Also, driving across an incline puts
more weight on the downhill wheels. This could
cause a downhill slide or a rollover.

D Surface conditions can be a problem when you drive

D Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the

incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into
a rut or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline doesn’t mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.

CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that’s too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously
injured or killed. If you have any doubt about
the steepness of the incline, don’t drive across it.
Find another route instead.

across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots, or even wet
grass can cause your tires to slip sideways, downhill.
If the vehicle slips sideways, it can hit something
that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.) and roll over.

4-27

What if I’m driving across an incline that’s not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start to
slide downhill. What should I do?

If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However, a
much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you’re crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you’ll be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.

4-28

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
won’t get good traction. You can’t accelerate as
quickly, turning is more difficult, and you’ll need
longer braking distances.
It’s best to use a low gear when you’re in mud -- the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you don’t
get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you’ll sense a change in wheel
traction. But it will depend upon how loosely packed the
sand is. On loosely packed sand (as on beaches or sand
dunes) your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This has
an effect on steering, accelerating and braking. You may
want to reduce the air pressure in your tires slightly
when driving on sand. This will improve traction.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it’s very easy to lose control. On wet
ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get moving,
poor steering and difficult braking can cause you to slide
out of control.

CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and
your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle
on safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water
Light rain causes no special off-road driving problems.
But heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood
waters demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it’s deep enough to cover your wheel hubs, axles or
exhaust pipe, don’t try it -- you probably won’t get
through. Also, water that deep can damage your axle
and other vehicle parts.

4-29

If the water isn’t too deep, then drive through it slowly.
At fast speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you’ll never be able to start your
engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.

CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it’s
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Don’t drive
through rushing water.
See “Driving Through Water” in the Index for more
information on driving through water.

4-30

After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust system
for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.

Driving at Night

Here are some tips on night driving.

D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
D
D
D
D

Night driving is more dangerous than day driving. One
reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired -- by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.

glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as
we get older these differences increase. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much light to see the
same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut
down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.

4-31

You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver
who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and
aren’t even aware of it.

4-32

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be
cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they
show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.

CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.

Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.

4-33

Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on
the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Driving Through Flowing Water

CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this
happens, you and the other vehicle occupants
could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs,
and otherwise be very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles
or standing water, water can come in through
your engine’s air intake and badly damage your
engine. Never drive through water that is slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Turn on your low-beam headlamps -- not just
your parking lamps -- to help make you more
visible to others.

D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following

D
4-34

distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
(See “Tires” in the Index.)

City Driving

Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:

D Know the best way to get to where you are

going. Get a city map and plan your trip into an
unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.

D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
(See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)

D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic

light is there because the corner is busy enough to
need it. When a light turns green, and just before you
start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have
not cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out
for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.

4-35

Freeway Driving

The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast or
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to
check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.

Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of all roads. But they have their own special rules.

4-36

Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going
slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh -- such as after a
day’s work -- don’t plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and
shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They’ll be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:

D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?

D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?

D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?

D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?

D Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

4-37

Highway Hypnosis

Hill and Mountain Roads

Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:

D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.

D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead

and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.

D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,

service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on
the highway as an emergency.

4-38

Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning
to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips
safer and more enjoyable. (See “Off-Road Driving” in
the Index for information about driving off-road.)

CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down. They could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have your engine running
and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.

D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid

levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.

D Know how to go down hills. The most important

thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.

D Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down

CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so
hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let your engine
assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.

D
D

to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing
or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding
roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.

4-39

Winter Driving

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help
provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these
items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

4-40

Whatever the condition -- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even
though you have an anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.

D Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.

D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the
least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about
freezing (32_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.

until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while
you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

4-41

If You’re Caught in a Blizzard

D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.

D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.

If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats -- anything you can wrap around yourself
or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:

D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-42

You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.

CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill
you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help
keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery charged. You will need a well-charged
battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling
later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run
for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get
out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.

4-43

Recreational Vehicle Towing
There may be times when you want to tow your vehicle
behind another vehicle for use at your destination.
Be sure to use the proper towing equipment designed
for recreational vehicle towing. Follow the instructions
for the towing equipment.
When towing your vehicle, turn the ignition to OFF.
To prevent your battery from draining while towing,
remove the IGN 0 fuse from the instrument panel fuse
block. Be sure to replace the fuse when you reach your
destination. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in
the Index.

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel-drive vehicles, should not be towed
with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed. To properly tow these vehicles, they
should be placed on a platform trailer with all four
wheels off the ground.
In rare cases when it’s unavoidable that a
two-wheel-drive vehicle is to be towed with all four
wheels on the ground, the propeller shaft to axle yoke
orientation should be marked and the propeller shaft
removed following the applicable service manual
removal/installation procedure.
Dust or dirt can enter the back of the transmission
through the opening created by removing the propeller
shaft if proper protection is not provided. Also, check
the transmission fluid level before driving the truck.

4-44

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

D Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the tow vehicle.

CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case into NEUTRAL (N) can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission
is in PARK (P), for an automatic transmission.
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift the
transfer case into NEUTRAL (N).

D Firmly set the parking brake.
D Shift the transmission to PARK (P).

D Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N).
See “Four-Wheel Drive” in the Index for
the proper procedure to select the NEUTRAL
position for your vehicle.

D Release the parking brake only after the

vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the
towing vehicle.

D Turn the ignition to OFF. The OFF position

unlocks the steering column and reduces battery
drain as long as the IGN 0 fuse is removed.
Unlocking the steering column will allow the
proper movement of the front wheels and tires
during towing.

4-45

Loading Your Vehicle

The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes
the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver’s door or in the Incomplete Vehicle Document
in the cab.

4-46

The Certification/Tire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. See “Front
Axle Reserve Capacity” later in this section.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.

NOTICE:
Some vehicles may be equipped with RPO VYU
(snow plow prep package). With this option, the
payload your vehicle can carry is reduced when
a snow plow is installed. Your vehicle can be
damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings,
or the GVW are exceeded.
As a general guideline, with a 650 lb. (295 kg)
snow plow, the weight of the occupants and cargo
must not exceed 300 lb. (135 kg). However, this
may depend on the vehicle’s option content.
Therefore, to help avoid vehicle damage:
D Make sure the weight on the front and
rear axles does not exceed their respective
axle ratings.
NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)

D For the front axle, if more cargo or

D
D

passengers need to be carried, appropriate
counter ballast must be installed rear of
the rear axle and properly secured.
Total vehicle weight must not exceed the
GVW rating.
See your dealer for advice and information
about using a snow plow on your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life
of your vehicle.

4-47

Your warranty does not cover parts or components that
fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask
your dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle -- like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else -- they go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.

CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
D Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
D Don’t leave a seat folded down unless you
need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle for
Off-Road Driving” in the Index.

4-48

Front Axle Reserve Capacity
This is the difference between your front GAWR and
the front axle weight of your truck with full fuel and
passengers. It is the amount of weight you can add to
your front axle before reaching your front GAWR.
The front axle reserve
capacity for your vehicle
can be found in the lower
right hand corner of the
tire/certification label, as
shown in this example.

(W x (A+W.B.)) / W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding
to the front axle
In order to calculate the amount of weight any
front accessory is adding to the front axle, use the
following formula.

Where:

W= Weight of added accessory
A= Distance that the accessory is
in front of the front axle
W.B.= Vehicle Wheelbase

4-49

For example, adding a 700 lb. ( 318 kg) snow plow
adds more than 700 lb. ( 318 kg) to the front axle.
Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft. (122 cm)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is
10 ft. (305 cm), then:
W= 700 lb. ( 318 kg), A= 4 ft. (122 cm) and
W.B.= 10 ft. (305 cm)
(W x (A+W.B.)) / W.B. = (700 x (4ft. + 10 ft.)) /
10 ft. = 980 lbs.
So, if your truck’s front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs. (445 kg), you could add this snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo or by positioning cargo more
towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the
load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear
GAWR and the GVWR must never be exceeded.

Total Vehicle Reserve Capacity
This is the difference between your GVWR and the
weight of your truck with full fuel and passengers.
It is the amount of weight you can add to your vehicle
before reaching your GVWR.
The reserve capacity numbers are intended as a guide
when selecting the amount of equipment or cargo your
truck can carry. If you are unsure of your truck’s front,
rear or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh
your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this.

Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch loads from the CWR
for your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with the trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or
GAWR. If you are using a weight-distributing hitch,
weigh the vehicle without the equalizer bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see “Trailer Towing” in the Index.

4-50

Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pull a
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,
the brakes may not work well -- or even at all.
You and your passengers could be seriously
injured. Pull a trailer only if you have followed
all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for
advice and information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.

To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is
for your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in
this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.

NOTICE:
Pulling a trailer improperly can damage your
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.

4-51

If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:

D There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this
information can be state or provincial police.

D Consider using a sway control if your trailer will

weigh less than the capacity stamped on your step
bumper. You should always use a sway control if
your trailer will weigh more than the capacity
stamped on your step bumper. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.

D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.

D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.

D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you

tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.

4-52

D You should tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to

shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary,
a lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too
often (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
If you have a manual transmission and you are towing
a trailer, it’s better not to use FIFTH (5) gear. Just
drive in FOURTH (4) gear (or, as you need to, a
lower gear). See “Tow/Haul Mode” in the Index.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
tow/haul mode is to:
D Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
D Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when the
vehicle is unloaded.
D Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring less
throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.

Your vehicle is equipped with a button at the end of
the shift lever which, when pressed, enables tow/haul.
Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoridet which
further improves your vehicle’s ride while towing.
See “Autoridet” in the Index for more information.
When the button is pressed, a light on the instrument
panel will illuminate to indicate that tow/haul has been
selected. Tow/haul may be turned off by pressing the
button again, at which time the indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle will
automatically turn off tow/haul every time it is started.
Tow/haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle
and trailer combined weight is at least 75% of the vehicle’s
Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). Tow/haul is
most useful under the following driving conditions:

D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
through rolling terrain.

D When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
D

in stop and go traffic.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load
in busy parking lots where improved low speed
control of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of tow/haul when the
vehicle is unloaded.

Such a selection when unloaded may result in
unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/haul is
recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.

Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much
your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
The engine oil cooler and the heavy-duty trailering
package is required on C/K-2500 models with the
VORTEC 6000 engine.

4-53

C-1500 (2WD)*

K-1500 (4WD)*

Engine (Trans.)

Axle
Ratio

Max. Trailer Wt.

Engine (Trans.)

Axle
Ratio

Max. Trailer Wt.

4800 V8

3.42
3.73

6,100 lbs. (2 767 kg)
7,100 lbs. (3 221 kg)

4800 V8

3.73
4.10

6,800 lbs. (3 084 kg)
7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)

5300 V8

3.42
3.73

7,100 lbs. (3 221 kg)
8,100 lbs. (3 674 kg)

5300 V8

3.73
4.10

7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)
8,800 lbs. (3 992 kg)

5300 V8
(Suburban/
Yukon XL)

3.73
4.10

8,000 lbs. (3 629 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)

5300 V8
(Suburban/
Yukon XL)

3.73
4.10

7,800 lbs. (3 538 kg)
8,800 lbs. (3 992 kg)

* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15%
of hitch pulling weight 1,200 lbs. (544 kg) maximum.

4-54

* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15%
of hitch pulling weight 1,200 lbs. (544 kg) maximum.

C-2500 LD (2WD)*

K-2500 HD (4WD)*

Engine (Trans.)

Axle
Ratio

Max. Trailer Wt.

6000 V8
(Suburban/
Yukon XL)

3.73
4.10

8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg)

* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15%
of hitch pulling weight 1,200 lbs. (544 kg) maximum.

Engine (Trans.)

Axle
Ratio

Max. Trailer Wt.

6000 V8
(Suburban/
Yukon XL)

3.73
4.10

8,100 lbs. (3 674 kg)
10,100 lbs. (4 581 kg)

* Weight-distributing hitch tongue weight 10% to 15%
of hitch pulling weight 1,200 lbs. (544 kg) maximum.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information Booklet.
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-55

Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total or gross
weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be
riding in the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you
must add the tongue load to the GVW because your
vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your Vehicle” in the Index for more information about
your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them
right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Tire Loading” in the Index. Then be sure you
don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.

4-56

Hitches

Safety Chains

It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:

You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from the
hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided
by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
For trailers up to 5,000 lbs. (2 270 kg) you may
attach the safety chains to the attaching points on the
bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or hitch
manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety
chains. If you have the factory-installed trailering
package, for vehicles equipped to pull a trailer up to
10,500 lbs. (4 763 kg), you may attach the safety chains
to the attaching point on the hitch platform. Always
leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
Never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

D If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper could

be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you have
ample room when turning to avoid contact between
the trailer and the bumper.

D If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than the capacity stamped on your
step bumper, be sure to use a properly mounted,
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the
proper size. This equipment is very important for
proper vehicle loading and good handling when
you’re driving.

4-57

Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs. (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes -- and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:

D The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.

D The trailer’s brake system will use less than

0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your
vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking
systems won’t work well. You could even lose
your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap
at the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.

4-58

Driving with a Trailer

CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and you pull
a trailer with your vehicle, carbon monoxide (CO)
could come into your vehicle. You can’t see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
(See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.) To maximize
your safety when towing a trailer:
D Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
D Keep the rear-most windows closed.
D If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main heating
or cooling system on and with the fan on any
speed. This will bring fresh, outside air into
your vehicle. Do not use MAX A/C because it
only recirculates the air inside your vehicle.
(See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.)

Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Following Distance

Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.

You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.

During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.

Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.

Passing

Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move
your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone guide you.

4-59

Making Turns

NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re
about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel
will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned
out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing
your signal when they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

4-60

Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often (e.g., under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
in the Index.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn
your engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) for a few
minutes before turning the engine off. If you do get
the overheat warning, see “Engine Overheating” in
the Index.

Parking on Hills

CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People can
be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer
can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL (N).
6. Release the regular brakes.

CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move,
even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the
steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL (N), your vehicle will be free to
roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear -- not
in NEUTRAL (N).

4-61

When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:

D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.

Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring Package

2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt, cooling system
and brake system. Each of these is covered in this
manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly.
If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review these
sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.

4-62

The trailer wiring harness with a seven-pin connector
located at the rear of the vehicle and are tied to the
vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be plugged
into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector
available through your dealer.

The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Package (If Equipped)

Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If you need to upgrade your vehicle to heavy-duty
trailering, a brake controller harness is available from
your dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector that is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform (if equipped).

4-63

The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Instrument Panel Jumper Wiring Harness

Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

A jumper harness for an electric trailer brake controller
and a trailer battery feed fuse are included with this
trailering package. (See “Instrument Panel Jumper
Wiring Harness” later in this section.)
If you need to tow a light-duty trailer with a standard
four-way round pin connector, an adapter connector is
available from your dealer.

4-64

This harness is included with the heavy-duty trailer
wiring package. The harness is for an electric trailer
brake controller and includes a trailer battery feed fuse.
This harness and fuse should be installed by your dealer
or a qualified service center.

Power Winches

Step-Bumper Pad

If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.

If your vehicle has a rear step bumper, it may be
equipped with a rear step pad at the center of the bumper.

NOTICE:
Using a power winch with the transmission in
gear may damage the transmission. When
operating a power winch, always leave the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N).

If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
you must remove the
center cutout circle to
install the trailer ball.

Use the regular brakes, set the parking brake, or block
the wheels to keep your vehicle from rolling.

4-65

Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-8
5-9

Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating

5-12
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-31

Cooling System
Engine Fan Noise
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow

5-1

Hazard Warning Flashers

Press the button at the top
of the steering column all
the way down to make your
front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, press the button until the first
click and release.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
But they won’t flash if you’re braking.

5-2

When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.

Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can use them to
warn others. Set one up at the side of the road about
300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.

Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. But please use the following steps to do it safely.

CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.

NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
The ACDelcoR battery in your vehicle has a
built-in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump
start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear
or light yellow. Replace the battery when there
is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a
cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.

5-3

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.

NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put the transmission in
PARK (P). If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).

5-4

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or accessory power outlets. Turn off all lamps
that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid
sparks and help save both batteries. In addition,
it could save your radio!

NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.

CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (-) terminal locations on the other vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (-) jump starting
terminal. The remote positive (+) terminal is located
behind a red plastic cover near the driver’s side of the
engine accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (-) terminal is located on the
engine accessory drive bracket. This is marked “GND”
on V8 engines.
You should always use the remote positive (+) and the
remote negative (-) terminals instead of the positive (+)
and negative (-) terminals on your battery.

CAUTION:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric fan under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running and can injure
you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.

CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t
need to add water to the ACDelcoR battery
installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount
of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take
care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.

5-5

5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or a remote positive terminal if the
vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy-unpainted metal engine part or a remote
negative terminal if the vehicle has one. Don’t
connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll get
a short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too.

CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.

5-6

6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.

7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) cable. Use
a remote negative (-)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next
step. The other end of the negative (-) cable doesn’t
go to the dead battery. It goes to a heavy unpainted
metal part of the vehicle with the dead battery or to
a remote negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.

9. When connecting the
cable, be sure it is not
near any engine parts
that will move.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.

5-7

12. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent
electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.

Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
To help avoid serious personal injury to you
or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that
is being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.

A. Heavy Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery

NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid
damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas
of the vehicle.

5-8

With current trends in automotive styles and design,
it is essential that the correct towing equipment is
used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed
with wheel-lift equipment or car carrier equipment.
Two-Wheel-Drive vehicle towing limits for wheel lift
equipment are as follows:

D Front Towing -- 35 mph (55 km/h) for 50 miles (80 km)
D Rear Towing -- 55 mph (88 km/h) or legal speed
limit and the distance is unlimited.

Four-Wheel-Drive vehicles must have the transfer
case in NEUTRAL (N). See “Four-Wheel Drive”
in the Index for the proper procedure to select the
NEUTRAL position for your vehicle. The towing limits
for four-wheel-drive vehicles with wheel-lift equipment
are as follows:

D Front Towing -- 55 mph (88 km/h) or legal speed
limit and distance is unlimited

D Rear Towing -- 55 mph (88 km/h) for 50 miles (80 km).
You cannot tow your vehicle using sling-type equipment.

Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage” in the Index. In addition,
you will find a LOW COOLANT, CHECK COOLANT
TEMP, ENGINE OVERHEATED and a REDUCED
ENGINE POWER message in the message center on the
instrument panel. See “Message Center” in the Index.

Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode (V8 Engines Only)
Should an overheated engine condition exist and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.

Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.

5-9

NOTICE:
After driving in the overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine damage, allow
the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair
the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset
the oil life monitor. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

5-10

CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle
until the engine is cool. See “Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep
driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. See “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” in the Index.

If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a little too hot when you:

D
D
D
D

Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” in the Index.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
4. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- DRIVE (D).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning doesn’t come back on,
you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off
the engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” listed previously in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.

1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. If you have an air conditioner and it’s on, turn it off.

5-11

Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:

CAUTION:
If your vehicle has air conditioning, the auxiliary
electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank surge tank
tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When the engine is cold,
the coolant level should
be at or above the FILL
COLD mark.

A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Fan

5-12

If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.

CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.

NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index.

NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you
use only DEX-COOLR (silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolant will require change sooner -- at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the
use of coolant other than DEX-COOLR is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
See if the engine cooling fan speed increases when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal
down. If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service.
Turn off the engine.

5-13

How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at or above the FILL COLD mark, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOLR
coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it. (See “Engine Coolant” in the
Index for more information.)

CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap -- even a little -- they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.

5-14

CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system is set for the proper coolant
mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOLR coolant.

NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
So use the recommended coolant.

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.

5-15

1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise (left) about one full turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there
is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.

5-16

3. Then fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
mixture, to the FILL COLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight.

By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FILL COLD mark.

5-17

Engine Fan Noise

If a Tire Goes Flat

Your vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages. So you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional
cooling is not required and the clutch disengages.

It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:

You may also hear this fan noise when you start
the engine. It will go away as the fan clutch
partially disengages.

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

5-18

Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.

CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over you or other
people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P) or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.

The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.

5-19

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you’ll need is under the storage tray in
the left trim panel for Suburban/Yukon XL Models.
For Utility Models, the equipment is located under
the rear seat behind the driver’s seat and behind the left
trim panel in the rear of the vehicle. Skip the first
step and follow the last three.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. There is a wing nut used to retain the tool kit.
To remove it, turn the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. To release the bottle jack from it’s holder, turn the
knob on the bottle jack counterclockwise to lower
the jack head.
4. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can be
removed by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
You’ll use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.

5-20

A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Up
F. Spare Tire

G.
H.
I.
J.

Tire Retainer
Hoist Cable
Hoist Lock
Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
K. Hoist End of
Extension Tool

Follow these instructions to lower the spare tire:
1. If the vehicle is equipped with a hoist lock, open
the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and use the
ignition key to remove the lock.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench and the two jack handle
extensions as shown. Insert the hoist end (open end)
of the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects into
the hoist shaft (the ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire).
3. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle. The wheel wrench has a
hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards
you, to assist in reaching the spare tire.
4. When the tire has been lowered, tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable so it can be pulled up through
the wheel opening.

The tools you’ll be using include the bottle jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
If the flat tire is on the rear of the vehicle, you’ll need
to use both jack handle extensions.

5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

5-21

Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions
(as needed). Attach the jack handle to the jack.

5-22

Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the jack lift
head to the lifting point.

If your vehicle has wheel
nut caps, loosen them by
turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. If you
have a center cap with
wheel nut caps, the wheel
nut caps are designed to
remain with the center cap.
Remove the center cap.

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench
to loosen all the
wheel nuts. Turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove the
wheel nuts yet.

If the wheel has a smooth center piece, place the chisel
end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently pry out.

5-23

CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.

Position the jack under the vehicle. If the flat tire
is on the front of the vehicle, position the jack on
the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap.
On all 1500 Series vehicles, use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. On 2500 Series vehicles,
use the axle between the spring and shock.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of
your vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before
raising the vehicle.

5-24

CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.

Rear Position
1500 Series

Rear Position
2500 Series

Front Position
2. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the rear
axle is resting securely between the grooves that are
on the jack head. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to fit back underneath the rear of the vehicle.

5-25

3. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.

4. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.

CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change a
wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.

CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.

5-26

5. After mounting the
spare, replace the
wheel nuts with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the wheel.
Tighten each wheel
nut by hand using the
wheel wrench until the
wheel is held against
the hub.

Rear Position
1500 Series

Rear Position
2500 Series

6. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

Front Position

5-27

CAUTION:

7. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the proper
torque. See “Capacities and Specifications” in
the Index.

NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the
wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification.

5-28

Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools

CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.

4. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle. Continue turning the wheel wrench until the
tire is secure and the cable is tight. The spare tire
hoist cannot be overtightened.

Store the flat tire where the spare tire was stored.
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. To store the tire:
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed upward.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the hoist shaft.

6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and
then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.

5-29

Replace the jack, tools and spare tire lock.

For Utility Models:
1. Put the tool kit with the jack tools and gloves in the
tool bag and place in the retaining dip under the
driver’s side second seat.
2. Tighten down with the the wing nut.
3. Then, assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack
together with the wing nut and retaining hook.
4. Position behind the jack storage cover in the left rear
side panel just below the speaker and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in
mounting bracket.
For Suburban/Yukon XL Models:

A. Hoist Assembly
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
Extensions
D. Hoist Shaft

E. Valve Stem,
Pointed Up
F. Flat or Spare Tire
G. Tire Retainer
H. Hoist Cable

To store the tools, follow these procedures.

5-30

1. Return the tool kit (jack tools and gloves) to the tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel chocks and bottle jack together with
the wingnut and retaining hook.
3. Position behind the jack storage cover in the left rear
side panel just below the speaker and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight in
mounting bracket.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left trim
panel and turn wingnut clockwise to secure.
5. Return the storage tray. See the jacking label for
further information.

If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow

NOTICE:

In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking”
can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.

Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.

CAUTION:

For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see “Tire Chains” in the Index.

If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transmission or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.

5-31

Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out

Using the Recovery Hooks

First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel drive vehicle, shift into 4HI or 4LO. If your
vehicle has the Traction Assist System, you should turn
it off by pressing the TAS on/off button. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release the
accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. By
slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse
directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free
your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries,
you may need to be towed out. Or, you can use your
recovery hooks if your vehicle has them. If you do need
to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.

Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The recovery hooks are provided at the front of your
vehicle. You may need to use them if you’re stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.

5-32

CAUTION:
The recovery hooks, when used, are under a lot
of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The
hooks could break off and you or others could be
injured from the chain or cable snapping back.

NOTICE:
Never use the recovery hooks to tow the vehicle.
Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not
be covered by warranty.

5-33

Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-5
6-7
6-8
6-10
6-14
6-16
6-17
6-20
6-21
6-22
6-25
6-26

Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear Axle
Four-Wheel Drive
Engine Coolant
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Power Steering Fluid

6-27
6-28
6-32
6-32
6-36
6-36
6-45
6-46
6-49
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-63
6-64
6-67

Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
Bulb Replacement
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

6-1

Service

Doing Your Own Service Work

Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for
all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.

If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Your vehicle may have an air bag system. If it does, see
“Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the
Index before attempting to do your own service work.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.

6-2

CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could be hurt.

Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.

Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher. It is recommended that the gasoline meet
specifications which have been developed by the
American Automobile Manufacturers Association
(AAMA) and endorsed by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle
performance and engine protection. Gasolines meeting
the AAMA specification could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane is at least 87. If the octane is
less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when
you drive. If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If you’re using fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when
you’re accelerating or driving up a hill. That’s normal,
and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get
rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means
you have a problem.

6-3

If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. (See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to
your authorized GM dealer for diagnosis to determine
the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the
cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.

To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and
fuel system, allowing your emission control system
to function properly. Therefore, you should not have
to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that
you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with
the specifications described earlier.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or
not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not
recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument
panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your
authorized GM dealer for service.

Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.

6-4

NOTICE:

Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

Filling Your Tank
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.

You can also write us at the following address for
advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The fuel cap is located on the driver’s side of your vehicle.

6-5

CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the
fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew
the cap all the way.
While refueling, hang the filler cap by the tether using
the hook located on the inside of the filler door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the
left (counterclockwise).

6-6

Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.

When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank and emissions system may be
damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in
the Index.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can
be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into
approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed
or on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.

6-7

Checking Things Under the Hood
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the vehicle
located under and to the left
of the steering wheel.

Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up on the
secondary hood release located just to the passenger’s
side of the center of the grill.
Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are on
properly. Pull down the hood and close it firmly.

6-8

VORTEC 4800, 5300 and 6000 V8 Engine
VORTEC 5300 V8 engine shown, locations for other engines similar.

A.
B.
C.
D.
E.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Coolant Surge Tank
Air Filter Restriction Indicator
Engine Oil Dipstick
Automatic Transmission Dipstick
(If Equipped)

F.
G.
H.
I.
J.

Engine Oil Fill
Fan
Remote Negative Terminal (GND)
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Remote Positive Terminal

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir
L. Underhood Electrical Center
M. Battery
N. Windshield Washer
Fluid Reservoir

6-9

Engine Oil
If the CHECK ENG OIL
LEVEL appears on the
instrument panel, it means
you need to check your
engine oil level right away.

The engine oil dipstick has
a yellow ring handle and is
located on the passenger’s
side of the engine.

For more information, see CHECK ENG OIL LEVEL
in the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.

Checking Engine Oil

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actual level.

It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.

Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

6-10

NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much
oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.

When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use. For
crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and Specifications”
in the Index.

The engine oil fill cap for
the VORTEC 4800, 5300
and 6000 V8 engines is
located on the passenger’s
side engine valve cover.

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when you’re through.

6-11

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any
oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:

6-12

As shown in the chart, SAE 5W-30 is best for your
vehicle. However, you can use SAE 10W-30 if it’s going
to be 0 F (-18 C) or above. These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W-50.

Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good
performance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine Oil

NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil
can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM GoodwrenchR oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below

-20_F (-29_C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide

easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.

Your vehicle has a computer that lets you know
when to change your engine oil. This is not based on
mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine operating
temperature. When the computer has calculated that
the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life System will
indicate that a change is necessary. The mileage between
oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you
drive your vehicle -- usually between 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your
last oil and filter change. Under severe conditions, the
system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months (whichever occurs first)
without an oil change.

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you
drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil
and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner.
Remember to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
whenever the oil is changed.

6-13

How to Reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL Message
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, turn
the ignition key to RUN with the engine off. Fully press
and release the accelerator pedal three times within five
seconds. If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message flashes
for five seconds, the system is reset.

What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin
for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and
water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing
oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of
oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used
oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.

6-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The air cleaner assembly
has an indicator that lets
you know when the air
filter is dirty and needs to
be serviced. The indicator
is located on the air
cleaner cover.

See “Owner Checks and Services” in the Index to
determine when to check the indicator.
If the area inside the clear section of the indicator is
not completely yellow, no air filter service is required.
When the area inside the indicator is completely yellow,
past the red band, the words “CHANGE FILTER” will
be highlighted. After changing the air filter, press the top
button on the indicator to reset it.

Your air cleaner is located in the passenger’s side front
corner of the engine compartment.

1. To remove the air filter, loosen the screws on the
cover. Then lift the cover upward and remove the
filter out of the air cleaner housing. Care should be
taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible.
2. Clean the filter sealing surface and the filter housing.
3. Install the new filter.
4. Install the cover and tighten the screws on the air
cleaner cover.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to
replace the air filter. See “Owner Checks and Services”
in the Index.

6-15

CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the
engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.

NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you’re driving.

6-16

Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger
compartment air filter. The filter is located under the
instrument panel below the glove compartment.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter:
1. If your vehicle is equipped with an access panel
located under the center of the instrument panel,
remove the bolts on it to take out the panel.
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have it done at your dealer’s
service department.
2. If your vehicle does
not have an access
panel under the center
of the instrument panel,
or when the panel is
removed, reach under
the instrument panel
towards the front of
the vehicle and pull
downward on the filter
retaining bracket.

3. Remove the air filter by pulling downward on the
element. Remove the second portion of the air filter
by sliding it towards the rear of the vehicle and then
pulling downward.
4. Install the new filter by reversing the steps listed
previously. Be sure to follow any instructions that
may be included in the replacement filter package.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
when to replace the passenger compartment air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance” in the Index.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.

How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult,
you may choose to have this done at the dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.

When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one
or more of these conditions:

D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check
your transmission fluid.

6-17

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:

D
D
D
D

When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180_F to
200_F (82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above
50_F (10_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C),
drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the engine
temperature gage moves and then remains steady
for 10 minutes. Then follow the hot check procedures.

Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has been sitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50_F (10_C) or
more. If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have
to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:

D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.

D With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).

D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift

lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).

D Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.

6-18

Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
1. The red transmission dipstick handle is located at the
rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger’s
side. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

6-19

How to Add Fluid

Rear Axle

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.

When to Check Lubricant

Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.) If the
fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to
bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint
(0.5 L). Don’t overfill.

How to Check Lubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index.

NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRONR-III, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transmission.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRONR-III
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.

D After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”

D When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.

6-20

1500 Series shown, 2500 Series similar

The proper level for the 1500 Series is from 5/8 inch
to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below the filler plug.
The proper level for the 2500 Series is from 0 to 3/8 inch
(0 to 10 mm) below the filler plug. Add only enough
fluid to reach the proper level.

How to Check Lubricant

What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

Four-Wheel Drive
Most lubricant checks in this section also apply to
four-wheel-drive vehicles. However, they have two
additional systems that need lubrication.

Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

Automatic Transfer Case
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Index.

6-21

When to Check Lubricant

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the filler
plug hole.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See “Scheduled Maintenance
Services” in the Index.

When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.

How to Check Lubricant

What to Use

Front Axle

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index.

Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOLR engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOLR extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.

6-22

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOLR coolant will:

D
D
D
D
D

Give freezing protection down to -34_F (-37_C).
Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.

What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOLR coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you
don’t need to add anything else.

6-23

NOTICE:

Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank
is located on the
passenger’s side of the
engine compartment.

If you use an improper coolant mixture, your
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.

NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to
add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to
improve the system. These can be harmful.

CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and
scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the surge tank pressure cap -- even a
little -- when the engine and radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is
cold, the coolant level should be at the FILL COLD mark.

6-24

If the LOW COOLANT
comes on and stays on,
it means you’re low on
engine coolant.

Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap

See “Low Coolant” in the Index.
Adding Coolant

If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.

CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is hand-tight.

The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank.

NOTICE:
Your coolant surge tank pressure cap is a 15 psi
(105 kPa) pressure-type cap and must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss and possible
engine damage from overheating.

6-25

Power Steering Fluid

How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down,
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.

What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index. Always use the proper
fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and
damage hoses and seals.

When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.

6-26

Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.

NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid,
D

Adding Washer Fluid

follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other parts of the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
your washer system and paint.

Open the cap labeled WASHER FLUID. Add washer
fluid until the tank is full.

6-27

Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid.

So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.

CAUTION:

There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that
fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you
should have your brake system fixed, since a leak
means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well,
or won’t work at all.

6-28

If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections” in the Index.

Checking Brake Fluid

What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index. Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.

CAUTION:

You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.

With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.

Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN. If it isn’t, have your brake
system checked to see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.

6-29

NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to
be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately. See “Appearance Care” in
the Index.

6-30

Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may
come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is
moving (except when you are pushing on the brake
pedal firmly).

CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.

NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this
manual under Part C “Periodic Maintenance Inspections.”

Brake Pedal Travel

Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you have to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change -- for the worse.
The braking performance you’ve come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.

See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

6-31

Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelcoR battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco battery.

Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.

CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage periods.

6-32

For your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent Feature” in
the Index. To reprogram your sunroof, see “Sunroof”
also in the Index.

Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your GM dealership service department.
Before you replace any bulbs, be sure that all the lamps
are off and the engine isn’t running. See “Replacement
Bulbs” in the Index for the proper types of bulbs to use.

Halogen Bulbs

CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Pull the headlamp lens assembly out.
1. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove the pins, turn the outer pin
outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner
pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.

3. Unplug the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from
the headlamp lens assembly.
5. Put the new bulb into the lens assembly and turn it
clockwise until it is tight. Use care not to touch the
bulb with your fingers or hands.
6. Plug in the electrical connector.
7. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the
vehicle. Install and tighten the two pins.

6-33

Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps

1. Remove the headlamp lens assembly as
mentioned previously.
2. Press the retainer clip, located behind the turn
signal housing, towards the outside of the vehicle.
3. Pull the turn signal housing out from the vehicle.
4. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it from the turn signal
lens housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put the new bulb into the bulb socket. Use care
not to touch the bulb with your fingers or hands.

A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
C. Front Turn Signal Lamp
D. Daytime Running Lamp

7. Put the bulb socket into the turn signal housing
and turn it clockwise until it locks.
8. Put the turn signal housing back onto the vehicle
placing the hook and posts on the inner side into the
alignment holes first and then the outer side into the
retainer bracket until you hear a click.
9. Put the headlamp lens assembly back into the vehicle.

6-34

2. Remove the lamp assembly.

Taillamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp

1. Use a Phillips
screwdriver to remove
the two screws from
the lamp assembly.

3. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
4. Pull the bulb straight
out from the socket.

5. Put a new bulb into the socket and press it in until
it is tight.
6. Reinstall the lens and the lens seal.

6-35

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement

Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see “Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts” in the
Index. Here’s how to remove the Shephard’s Hook type.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiper arm and rotate the blade until it is
facing away from the windshield.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

Tires
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.

6-36

Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details.

Inflation -- Tire Pressure

CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in
the Index.
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact -- such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your
tread is badly worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.

The Certification/Tire label, which is on the rear edge of
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
You can operate some vehicles at reduced inflation
pressures only when you’ll be carrying reduced loads.
On those vehicles, the minimum cold inflation pressures
for a typical reduced load are printed on the Improved
Ride Tire Pressure label located on the driver’s door.
Weigh the vehicle to find the load on each tire and see
the label for the minimum cold inflation pressures for
that load.

6-37

When to Check

NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or
overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can
get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.

6-38

Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the
tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.

Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for more
information. Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.
Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.
If it moves, use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the
cable. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools”
in the Index.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.

CAUTION:

When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which
it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after a time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places where the wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you
can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later,
if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)

6-39

When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:

D You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.

D You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.

D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.

6-40

D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that

can’t be repaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.

Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need,
look at the Certification/Tire label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normal service
on your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having
a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.

CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.

6-41

Treadwear

Temperature -- A, B, C

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.

Traction -- AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

6-42

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear
or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the
alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road,
your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use
the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for replacement.

6-43

NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for
more information.
Used Replacement Wheels

CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous.
You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s
been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an
accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.

6-44

Tire Chains

NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16, LT265/75R16,
P265/70R16 or P265/70R17 size tires, don’t use
tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there’s not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
NOTICE: (Continued)

NOTICE: (Continued)
If you have a tire size other than P265/75R16,
LT265/75R16, P265/70R16 or P265/70R17, use
tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
tires. Install them on the tires of the rear axle.
Don’t use chains on the tires of the front axle.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.

Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover

They can all be hazardous -- some more than
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

6-45

Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D Alcohol
D Laundry Soap
D Bleach
D Reducing Agents

Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.

Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and
Soil Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will
clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:

D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.

6-46

D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a

clean area often. A soft brush may be used if
stains are stubborn.

D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning,

clean the entire area immediately or it will set.

Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge.
Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.

Special Fabric Cleaning Problems

Cleaning Vinyl

Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:

Use warm water and a clean cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.

D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if

2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.

D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.

you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.

3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.

Cleaning Leather

4. Let dry.

D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your

Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:

Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap
or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
dealer for this product.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive

2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.

D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned

3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.

cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.

6-47

Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel

Cleaning Glass Surfaces

Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.

Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner
or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)

Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.

Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.

CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.

6-48

Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across
the defogger grid.

Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield, Backglass and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM Windshield
Cleaner, Bon AmiR Powder (non-scratching glass cleaning
powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if
beads do not form when you rinse it with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper
blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.

Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)

Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention and durability.

Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.

Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on
the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid
surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”

Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials”
in the Index.)

6-49

Your vehicle may have a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint
finish. The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that
are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.

NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on
painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.

6-50

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.

Cleaning Aluminum or
Chrome-Plated Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners
with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because
you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish
on aluminum wheels.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.

Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to the parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Cleaning Tires

Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.

To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.

Finish Damage

NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care
to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage
the paint finish and tires.

Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.

6-51

Underbody Maintenance

Chemical Paint Spotting

Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor
pan and exhaust system even though they have
corrosion protection.

Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.

At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do
this for you.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,
GM will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition
within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.

6-52

This applies only to materials manufactured and sold by
General Motors. Bodies, body conversions or equipment
not made or sold by General Motors are not covered.

GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427

SIZE
23 in. x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
32 oz. (0.946 L)
23 oz. (0.680 L)

1052918**

8 oz. (0.237 L)

DESCRIPTION
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner

t Protectant

Armor All

Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel Cleaner
1052930
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Capture Dry Spot Remover
12345721
2.5 sq. ft.
Synthetic Chamois
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Finish Enhancer
12377966*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
12377984*
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Surface Cleaner
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1052925

16 oz. (0.473 L)

USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas , plastic,
rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels
and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.

6-53

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label located in the glove box. It’s very
helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.

D
D
D
D

your VIN,
the model designation,
paint information and
a list of all production options and
special equipment.

Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.

6-54

Electrical System

Windshield Wipers

Add-On Electrical Equipment

The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.

NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as
they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.

Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.

Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.

6-55

If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without -- like the radio or cigarette
lighter -- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.

You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse block
access door. These can be used to replace a bad fuse.
However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access door
is on the driver’s side edge
of the instrument panel.
Pull off the cover to access
the fuse block.

You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor which is
mounted to the fuse block access door. To remove fuses
if you don’t have a fuse extractor, hold the end of the
fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull
straight out.

6-56

NAME

Usage

L BODY

Retained Accessory Power Relay

LOCK

Power Door Locks

DRV UNLOCK

Power Door Lock Relay

NAME

Usage

NAME

Usage

LOCK

Power Door Lock Relay

HTR A/C

Climate Control System

HVAC 1

Climate Control System

WS WPR

Windshield Wipers

CRUISE

Cruise Control, Instrument Cluster

IGN 1

Ignition, Instrument Panel

IGN 3

Ignition, Power Seats

AIR BAG

Air Bag

4WD

Four-Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery

MIR/LOCK

Power Mirrors, Power Door Locks

DR LOCK

Power Door Locks

CRANK

Starting System

PWR WDO

Power Window Circuit Breaker

INT PRK

Parking Lamps, Sidemarker
Lamps, Interior Lamps

UNLOCK

Power Door Lock Relay

L DOOR

Power Door Lock Relay

IGN 0

BRAKE

Anti-Lock Brake System

PRND321 Display, Odometer,
VCM/PCM

SEO IGN

RR WIPER

Rear Window Wiper

Special Equipment Option,
Ignition

ILLUM

Interior Lamps

SEO ACCY

SEAT

Power Seat Circuit Breaker

Special Equipment Option
Accessory, Cellular Telephone

TURN

Exterior Lamps, Turn Signals,
Hazard Lamps

RAP #1

Retained Accessory Power Relay

RDO 1

Audio System

RAP #2

Rear Power Windows,
Sunroof, Radio

UNLOCK

Power Door Locks

6-57

Center Instrument Panel Utility Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.

6-58

Relay Name
SEO
HTD ST
HDLNR
VANITY
TRAILER
PWR ST
YE9
UPF
PARK LAMP
FRT PRK EXPT
SPARE 2
PUDDLE LP
SL RIDE
SPARE 3
INADV PWR
CTSY LP
CEL PHONE

Usage
Special Equipment Option
Heated Seats
Headliner
Headliner Wiring
Trailer Brake Wiring
Power Seats
Not Used
Upfitter
Parking Lamps
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Interior Lights Feed
Courtesy Lamps
Cellular Telephone Wiring

Underhood Electrical Center

The underhood electrical center is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment near the
battery. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
You can remove fuses with a fuse extractor. The fuse
extractor is located in the underhood electrical center.
To remove fuses if you don’t have a fuse extractor,
hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index
finger and pull straight out.

6-59

6-60

Name

Usage

Name

Usage

STUD #1

Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Feed/Load Leveling

FRT HVAC

Climate Control System

STOP LP

Exterior Lamps, Stoplamps

ABS

Anti-Lock Brakes

ECM 1

VCM/PCM

IGN A

Ignition Switch

CHMSL

Center High Mounted Stoplamp

AIR

A.I.R. System

VEH STOP

Stoplamps, Cruise Control

RAP #1

Retained Accessory Power,
Power Mirrors, Power Door
Locks, Power Seat(s)

TRL B/U

Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring

INJ A

Fuel Controls, Ignition

IGN B

Ignition Switch

RR HVAC

Rear HVAC

RAP #2

Retained Accessory Power/Rear
Power Windows, Sunroof, Radio

VEH B/U

Vehicle Backup Lamps

ENG 1

STUD #2

Accessory Power/Trailer Wiring
Brake Feed

Engine Controls, Canister Purge,
Fuel System

ETC

Electronic Throttle Control

TRL R TRN

Right Turn Signal Trailer Wiring

IGN E

TRL L TRN

Left Turn Signal Trailer Wiring

IGN 1

Ignition, Fuel Controls

A/C Compressor Relay, Rear
Window Defogger, Daytime
Running Lamps, A.I.R. System

INJ B

Ignition, Fuel Controls (Relay)

B/U LP

STARTER

Starter (Relay)

Backup Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System

PARK LP

Parking Lamps

ATC

Automatic Transfer Case

6-61

Name

Usage

Name

Usage

RR DEFOG

Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors (Relay)

A/C

Air Conditioning

AUX PWR

RTD

Autoride

Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets

RR PRK

Right Rear Parking Lamps

SEO 2

ECM B

VCM/PCM

Special Equipment Option Power,
Power Seats, Aux Roof Mnt Lamp

F/PMP

Fuel Pump (Relay)

SEO 1

Special Equipment Option Power,
Aux Roof Mnt Lamp, Cell Phone

O2 A

Oxygen Sensors

DRL

Daytime Running Lamps

O2 B

Oxygen Sensors

A/C

A/C (Relay)

LR PRK

Left Rear Parking Lamps

FOG LP

Fog Lamps

RR DEFOG

Rear Window Defogger,
Heated Mirrors

FOG LP

Fog Lamps (Relay)

HDLP

Headlamps (Relay)

RADIO

Audio System, Instrument Cluster,
Climate Control System

TRL PRK

Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring

CIGAR

PRIME

Not Used

Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary
Power Outlets

RT HDLP

Right Headlamps

RT TURN

Right Turn Signals

DRL

Daytime Running Lamps (Relay)

BTSI

HTD MIR

Heated Mirrors

Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control System

LT HDLP

Left Headlamps

LT TURN

Left Turn Signals

6-62

t (Real Time Damping)

Name

Usage

FR PRK

Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps

W/W PMP

Windshield Washer Pump

HORN

Replacement Bulbs*
Low-Beam Headlamps

9006

High-Beam Headlamps

9005

Horn (Relay)

Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)

3157K
X

IGN C

Ignition Switch, Fuel Pump,
PRND321 Display, Crank

Front Marker Lamp

194

RDO AMP

Radio Amplifier

HAZ LP

Exterior Lamps, Hazard Lamps

Front Parking and
Turn Lamp

3157N
A

EXP LPS

Not Used

Rear Marker Lamp,
Taillamp and Stop Lamp

3157

HORN

Horn

Rear Turn Lamp

3157

CTSY LP

Interior Lamps

Back-up Lamp

3157

RR WPR

Rear Wipers

TBC

Body Control Module, Remote
Keyless Entry, Headlamps

* For replacement bulbs not listed here, please consult
your dealer.

6-63

Capacities and Specifications
Please refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information. See refrigerant charge label
under the hood for charge capacity information and requirements.
Engine

Type

VIN Code

Spark Plug Gap

VORTEC 4800

0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

VORTEC 5300

0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

VORTEC 6000

0.060 inches (1.52 mm)

Wheels and Tires
Model

Description

Torque

C/K 1500

6 bolts (14 mm)

140 lb-ft (190 N·m)

C/K 2500

8 bolts (14 mm)

140 lb-ft (190 N·m)

Tire Pressure

6-64

See the Certification/Tire label on the rear edge of the driver’s door,
or the incomplete vehicle document in the cab.

Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. See “Cooling System” in the Index.
Engine

Transmission

Quantity

VORTEC 4800 V8

Automatic with front A/C

14.4 quarts (13.7 L)

VORTEC 4800 V8

Automatic with front and rear A/C

15.8 quarts (15.0 L)

VORTEC 5300 V8

Automatic with front A/C

14.4 quarts (13.7 L)

VORTEC 5300 V8*

Automatic with front and rear A/C

15.8 quarts (15.0 L)

VORTEC 6000 V8

Automatic

15.8 quarts (15.0 L)

VORTEC 6000 V8**

Automatic with engine oil cooler

15.4 quarts (14.6 L)

* Vehicles equipped with the optional air conditioner.
** Vehicles equipped with the optional engine oil cooler.
Add one liter if equipped with rear heating for all engines.

6-65

Crankcase Capacity (Approximate)
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine oil so that the fluid is within the proper operating range.
See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
VIN

Quantity with Filter[

VORTEC 4800 V8

6.0 quarts (5.7 L)

VORTEC 5300 V8

6.0 quarts (5.7 L)

VORTEC 6000 V8

6.0 quarts (5.7 L)

Engine

[Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.

Fuel Tank Capacity (Approximate)
Type

Quantity

4 Door Utility

26.0 U.S. gallons (98.4 L)

Suburban/Yukon XL (1500 Series)

32.5 U.S. gallons (123.0 L)

Suburban/Yukon XL (2500 Series)

38.5 U.S. gallons (147.6 L)

6-66

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement part numbers listed in this section are based on the latest information available at the time of printing,
and are subject to change. If a part listed in this manual is not the same as the part used in your vehicle when it was
built, or if you have any questions, please contact your GM dealer.
These specifications are for information only. If you have any questions, see the service manual for the chassis or
refer to the body manufacturer’s publications.
VIN Code
V
T
U
Oil Filter*
PF59
PF59
PF59
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter*
A1518C
A1519C[
A1519C[
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit**
52485513
52485513
52485513
PCV Valve*
CV948C
CV948C
CV948C
Spark Plugs* [[
41-952
41-952
41-952
Fuel Filter*
GF626
GF626
GF626
Wiper Blades (Front) **
15706394
15706394
15706394
Wiper Blade Type (Front)
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
Wiper Blade Length (Front)
22 inches (56.0 cm)
22 inches (56.0 cm)
22 inches (56.0 cm)
Wiper Blades (Rear) **
22154396
22154396
22154396
Wiper Blade Type (Rear)
ITTA
ITTA
ITTA
Wiper Blade Length (Rear)
18 inches (45.0 cm)
18 inches (45.0 cm)
18 inches (45.0 cm)
*AC part number
**GM part number
[A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
[[ Spark Plug Gap is 0.060 inches

6-67

Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-4
7-5

Introduction
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Scheduled Maintenance

7-16
7-21
7-23
7-26

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record

7-1

Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.

Maintenance Requirements
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.

7-2

Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in
this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure to
follow recommended maintenance may not be covered
by warranty.

How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.

CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can
be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance
work only if you have the required know-how
and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you
what should be checked and when. It also explains
what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help keep
your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or
their equivalents, should be used whether you do the
work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you
to record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.

If you want to get the service information, see “Service
and Owner Publications” in the Index.

7-3

Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short
distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive
long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in
many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read the
following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them. If you
go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:

D carry passengers and cargo within recommended

limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certification/Tire label. See “Loading Your Vehicle”
in the Index.

D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.

D are driven off-road in the recommended manner. See
“Off-Road Driving With Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” in the Index.

D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.

7-4

Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services
shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) and
200,000 miles (332 000 km) should be performed
at the same intervals after 150,000 miles (240 000 km)
and 200,000 miles (332 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.

Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of
this schedule.

7-5

Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by
the GM Oil Life Systemt (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). Reset the system. The system
will show you when to change the oil -- usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km)
since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the
indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and
filter change.

7-6

The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you
drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and
filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears. Remember
to reset the Oil Life System when the oil and filter have
been changed. See “Oil Life System” in the Index for
information on resetting.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil and
filter change. Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints,
steering linkage, transmission shift linkage, transfer case
shift linkage, parking brake cable guides, and brake
front axle. Ball joints should not be lubricated unless
their temperature is 10_F (-12_C) or higher, or they
could be damaged.

Scheduled Maintenance

7-7

Scheduled Maintenance

7-8

Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)

j Drive axle service. If your vehicle is used to pull a trailer, a rear axle fluid
j
j

change is recommended after a break-in period. Change the rear axle fluid
after the first 500 miles (800 km) of trailer towing. See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Index for the proper fluid to use.
Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

15,000 Miles (25 000 km)

j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

22,500 Miles (37 500 km)

j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-9

Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

An Emission Control Service. (See footnote[.)

37,500 Miles (62 500 km)

45,000 Miles (75 000 km)

7-10

Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)

j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the
fluid and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).

52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
(Continued)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-11

Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) (Continued)
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Inspect Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system as described in the
service manual.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Inspect Evaporative Control System. Check all fuel and vapor lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, routing and condition. Check that the purge valve works
properly, if equipped. Replace as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)

j
j
j

67,500 Miles (112 500 km)

7-12

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

82,500 Miles (137 500 km)

90,000 Miles (150 000 km)

j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you drive regularly
under dusty conditions, the filter may require replacement more often.
j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Replace fuel filter.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote [.)
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

7-13

Scheduled Maintenance
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)

j Check rear/front axle fluid level and add fluid as needed. Check constant
velocity joints and axle seals for leaking.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)

100,000 Miles (166 000 km)

j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
j Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.

7-14

Scheduled Maintenance

j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
j

previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission fluid,
change both the fluid and filter.
Inspect Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) valve.
An Emission Control Service.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)

j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,

whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.

DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE

SERVICED BY:

7-15

Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emission control
performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.

At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant
to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.

Engine Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOLR
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if
necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the
Index for further details.

At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in
the Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.

7-16

At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.

Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check
of the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that the
spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the ratchet/wheel
wrench to tighten the cable. See “Storing the Spare Tire
and Tools” in the Index.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Restriction
Indicator Check
Your vehicle has an indicator located on the air cleaner
in the engine compartment that lets you know when
the air cleaner filter is dirty and needs to be changed.
Check indicator at least twice a year or when your oil is
changed, whichever occurs first. See “Air Cleaner” in
the Index for more information. Inspect your air cleaner
filter restriction indicator more often if the vehicle is
used in dusty areas or under off road conditions.

7-17

Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index.)
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.
See “Automatic Transmission Fluid” in the Index.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system
and repair if needed.

7-18

At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hood latch assembly, secondary latch,
pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment
hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door
detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge,
locks and folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what
to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the
regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.

Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control
System Check

CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake”
in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.

7-19

Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.

D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift
lever is in PARK (P).

D The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check

CAUTION:

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.

D To check the parking brake’s holding ability:

With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.

D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding

ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.

Underbody Flushing Service
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.

7-20

At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.

Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are
completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.

Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.

Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which could
cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust”
in the Index.

Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the
cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at
least once a year.

7-21

Throttle System Inspection

Brake System Inspection

Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding,
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as
needed. Replace any components that have high effort
or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and
cruise control cables.

Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and
rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts,
including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to
have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) Inspection
Every 12 months or at oil change intervals, check front
axle and transfer case and add lubricant when necessary.
Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper
installation. More frequent lubrication may be required
on off-road use.

7-22

Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtained from
your dealer.
USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Engine Oil

Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified
For Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol of the proper viscosity.
To determine the preferred
viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see “Engine Oil” in
the Index.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and use only GM
GoodwrenchR DEX-COOLR
or HavolineR DEX-COOLR
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant”
in the Index.

USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer Solvent

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Delco Supreme 11R Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
GM OptikleenR Washer
Solvent (GM Part No. 1051515)
or equivalent.

Hydraulic Clutch
System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. 12345347 or
equivalent DOT-3 Brake Fluid).

Power Steering
System

GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).

Automatic
Transmission

DEXRONR-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock
Cylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

7-23

USAGE
Floor Shift
Linkage

FLUID/LUBRICANT

LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis
Lubrication

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Front Axle

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. 1052271
or equivalent).

Rear Axle

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12378261)
or equivalent meeting GM
Specification 9986115.

7-24

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Automatic
Transfer Case

Automatic Transfer Case Fluid
(GM Part No. 12378396).

Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
or One-Piece
Propshaft Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12345879) or
lubricant meeting requirements of
GM 9985830.

Rear Driveline
Center Spline

Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of NLGI # 2, Category LB
or GC-LB.

Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl

LubriplateR Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC-LB.

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

USAGE

FLUID/LUBRICANT

Hood Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Conditioning

Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. 12345579
or equivalent).

Body Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate
Hinge and
Linkage, Folding
Seats and Fuel
Door Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).

Weatherstrip
Squeaks

Synthetic Grease with Teflon,
SuperlubeR (GM Part
No. 12371287 or equivalent).

7-25

Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performed the service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.

Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retain all
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-26

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Maintenance Record
DATE

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

7-27

Maintenance Record
DATE

7-28

ODOMETER
READING

SERVICED BY

MAINTENANCE PERFORMED

Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8

Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users
Customer Assistance Offices
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation

8-9
8-10
8-10
8-11
8-11

Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
Ordering Owner Publications in Canada

8-1

Customer Satisfaction Procedure

Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will
be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.

8-2

STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by
calling 1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:

D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available

from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate
at the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.)

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have
a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you
continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet
for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage

8-3

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to
settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the
interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of
the program is free of charge and your case will generally
be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed
with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.

8-4

Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY
users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write
to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to Chevrolet’s
Customer Assistance Center.

United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USAR (243-8872)

Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations
GMODC - Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax:
905-644-4866

Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.

If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean,
call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.

GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward aftermarket driver or
passenger adaptive
equipment you may require
for your vehicle (hand
controls, wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
When calling from outside Canada, please dial
1-905-644-3063. All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

8-5

Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program

If your problem cannot be resolved over the
phone, our advisors have access to a nationwide network
of dealer recommended service providers. Roadside
membership is free; however some services may incur costs.
Roadside offers two levels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy Care:

D
D
D
D

To enhance Chevrolet’s strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. As the owner of a 2000 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872).
This toll-free number will provide you over-the-phone
roadside assistance with minor mechanical problems.

8-6

Toll-free number, 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmith/key service, glass
repair, etc.)
ROADSIDE Courtesy Care PROVIDES:
D Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
D FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
D FREE Locksmith/Key Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
D FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
D FREE Jump Start (at home or on the road)

D FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)

Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportation for customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with the coverage provided by
the Bumper-to-Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 2000 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retail lease
customers operating 2000 and newer Chevrolet vehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
service management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not part of or
included in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet reserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Care
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.

For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:

D
D
D
D
D
D
D

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
License plate number
Vehicle color
Vehicle location
Telephone number where you can be reached
Vehicle mileage
Description of problem

Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.

Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.

8-7

Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.

Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your
vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for
service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.

8-8

If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for same day repair.

Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Chevrolet helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with minimal interruption of
your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a
destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a
rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a
maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and
may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.

Courtesy Transportation is available only at
participating dealers and all program options, such as
shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your
dealer for details.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the
terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.

Additional Program Information

Warranty Information

Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new
vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.

Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warranty information.

8-9

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in the
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.

8-10

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS

Ordering Owner Publications
in Canada

In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Owner’s manuals are available for purchase for all
current and most past model General Motors vehicles.

Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.

8-11

2000 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00

OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.

TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00

SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed
to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207

8-12

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.

OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)

ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)

1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927

2
0
0
0

PUBLICATION FORM
NUMBER

Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return
information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied
against the original order.

ITEM DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE MODEL
NAME

YEAR

QTY.

PRICE
EACH*

Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair

2000

$120.00

2000

$50.00

Owner’s Manual In Portfolio

2000

$20.00

Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio

2000

$15.00

TOTAL
PRICE

G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the
name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.

(CUSTOMER’S NAME)

(ATTENTION)

(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)

(CITY)

(STATE)

DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.

(ZIP CODE)

(

)

AREA CODE

GM-CHE-ORD99

*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T

Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
only — do not send cash.)

TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers
add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing

MasterCard
VISA

$6.00

Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)

GRAND TOTAL

Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:

Check here if your billing address
is different from your shipping
address shown.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payable in U.S. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add $11.50 plus the
U.S. order processing.

8-13

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.5-c012 1.149602, 2012/10/10-18:10:24
Format                          : application/pdf
Subject                         : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Description                     : 1st Edition Owner's Manual
Modified                        : 2014:11:03 09:43:57.011-05:00
Creator                         : Copyright 1999 General Motors Corporation
Title (x-repair)                : 2000 Chevrolet GMT800 Tahoe
Size                            : 3081670
Author                          : Copyright 1999 General Motors Corporation
Extracted                       : 2014:11:02 09:36:04.946-06:00
Sha 1                           : 5dac23029217fa5b95dc6d12a112d30e29ae9895
Modify Date                     : 1999:11:01 08:28:56-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 1999:11:01 08:28:56-06:00
Keywords                        : 
Tags                            : OwnerCenter:GMNA/asset_type/owner_manual, OwnerCenter:GMNA/2000/chevrolet/suburban
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 407
Title                           : Owner's Manual

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Chevrolet 2000 Suburban Owners Manual Owner's

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation